S9700 Series Switches Hardware Description

S9700 Series Terabit Core Routing Switches
Hardware Description
Issue 27
Date 2019-05-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2019. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://e.huawei.com
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Intended Audience
This document is intended for network engineers responsible for network design and
deployment. You should understand your network well, including the network topology and
service requirements.
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.
NOTE Calls attention to important information,

best practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not
related to personal injury, equipment
damage, and environment deterioration.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Hardware Description About This Document
Convention Description
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
&<1-n> The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n

times.
# A line starting with the # sign is comments.
Disclaimer
l This document is designed as a reference for you to configure your devices. Its contents,
including web pages, command line input and output, are based on laboratory conditions.
It provides instructions for general scenarios, but does not cover all use cases of all
product models. The examples given may differ from your use case due to differences in
software versions, models, and configuration files. When configuring your device, alter
the configuration depending on your use case.
l The specifications provided in this document are tested in lab environment (for example,
a certain type of cards have been installed on the tested device or only one protocol is
run on the device). Results may differ from the listed specifications when you attempt to
obtain the maximum values with multiple functions enabled on the device.
l In this document, public IP addresses may be used in feature introduction and
configuration examples and are for reference only unless otherwise specified.
Device Dimension Conventions

The dimensions described in this document are theoretically typical dimensions and do not
include dimension tolerances.
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Using the Hardware Query Tool and the Hardware Configuration Tool.......................... 1
2 Version Requirements for Components................................................................................... 3
3 Cabinets........................................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 N66E Cabinet................................................................................................................................................................. 4
3.1.1 Appearance of an N66E Cabinet................................................................................................................................. 4
3.1.2 Specifications of an N66E Cabinet..............................................................................................................................5
3.1.3 Components of an N66E Cabinet................................................................................................................................ 8
3.1.4 Structural Features of an N66E Cabinet...................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 N68E Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.2.1 Appearance of an N68E Cabinet............................................................................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Specifications of an N68E Cabinet............................................................................................................................12
3.2.3 Components of an N68E cabinet............................................................................................................................... 15
3.2.4 Structural Features of an N68E Cabinet.................................................................................................................... 15
4 Chassis........................................................................................................................................... 20
4.1 S9703............................................................................................................................................................................ 20
4.2 S9706............................................................................................................................................................................ 33
4.3 S9712............................................................................................................................................................................ 52
5 Power Supply Facilities..............................................................................................................74

5.1 Power Module...............................................................................................................................................................74
5.1.1 2200 W DC Power Module....................................................................................................................................... 74
5.1.2 800 W AC Power Module......................................................................................................................................... 79
5.1.3 2200 W AC Power Module....................................................................................................................................... 84
5.1.4 3000 W AC Power Module....................................................................................................................................... 90
5.2 Power Distribution Box................................................................................................................................................ 95
5.2.1 2200 W DC Power Distribution Box.........................................................................................................................95
5.2.2 800 W AC Power Distribution Box...........................................................................................................................98
5.2.3 2200 W AC Power Distribution Box.......................................................................................................................100
6 Fan Module................................................................................................................................. 105

6.1 EH1M00FBX000 Fan Module................................................................................................................................... 105
7 Cards............................................................................................................................................ 109
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

7.1 Naming Conventions.................................................................................................................................................. 109

7.2 Card Types.................................................................................................................................................................. 117
7.3 Card Structure and Dimensions.................................................................................................................................. 144
7.4 Interface Numbering...................................................................................................................................................146
7.5 Main Control Units and Subcards.............................................................................................................................. 147
7.5.1 EH1D2SRUC000-S9706/S9712 Main Control Unit C (Optional Clock)............................................................... 148
7.5.2 EH1D2SRUDC00-S9706/S9712 Main Control Unit D (Optional Clock).............................................................. 154
7.5.3 EH1D2SRUDC01-S9706/S9712 Main Control Unit D (Optional Clock).............................................................. 161
7.5.4 EH1D2MCUAC00-S9703 Main Control Unit A (Optional Clock)........................................................................ 167
7.5.5 LE0D00CKMA00 Clock Pinch Board,-1588..........................................................................................................173
7.5.6 EH1D2VS08000-8-Port 10G Cluster Switching System Service Unit (SFP+)...................................................... 177
7.6 EH1D200CMU00-Centralized Monitoring Unit........................................................................................................182
7.7 LE0D0VAMPA00-Value-Added Service Unit........................................................................................................... 186
7.8 EH1D2PS00P00-Open Service Platform Unit........................................................................................................... 189
7.9 100M Interface Cards................................................................................................................................................. 196
7.9.1 EH1D2F48TEA0-48-Port 10/100BASE-T Interface Card (EA, RJ45).................................................................. 196
7.9.2 EH1D2F48TEC0-48-Port 10/100BASE-T Interface Card (EC, RJ45)...................................................................199
7.9.3 EH1D2F48TFA0-48-Port 10/100BASE-T Interface Card (FA, RJ45)................................................................... 202
7.9.4 EH1D2F48SEA0-48-Port 100BASE-X Interface Card (EA, SFP).........................................................................205
7.9.5 EH1D2F48SEC0-48-Port 100BASE-X Interface Card (EC, SFP)......................................................................... 208
7.10 1000M Interface Cards............................................................................................................................................. 211
7.10.1 EH1D2G24SSA0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (SA, SFP)..............................................................211
7.10.2 ET1D2G24SEC0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (EC, SFP).............................................................. 215
7.10.3 EH1D2G24SEC0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (EC, SFP)............................................................. 219
7.10.4 EH1D2G24SED0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (ED, SFP)............................................................. 223
7.10.5 EH1D2S24CSA0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 8-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Combo Interface Card (SA, SFP/
RJ45).................................................................................................................................................................................227
7.10.6 EH1D2S24CEA0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 8-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Combo Interface Card(EA, SFP/
RJ45, 1588).......................................................................................................................................................................232
7.10.7 ET1D2G24SX5E-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (X5E, SFP)........................................................... 238
7.10.8 ET1D2T36SEA0-36-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T and 12-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (EA, RJ45/SFP)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 242
7.10.9 EH1D2T36SEA0-36-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T and 12-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (EA, RJ45/SFP)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 246
7.10.10 ET1D2G48TEA0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (EA, RJ45)..................................................... 251
7.10.11 EH1D2G24TFA0-24-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (FA, RJ45)......................................................254
7.10.12 EH1D2G48TEA0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (EA, RJ45).....................................................257
7.10.13 ET1D2G48TEC0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (EC, RJ45)..................................................... 260
7.10.14 EH1D2G48TEC0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (EC, RJ45)..................................................... 263
7.10.15 EH1D2G48TED0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (ED, RJ45).....................................................266
7.10.16 EH1D2G48TFA0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (FA, RJ45)......................................................269
7.10.17 ET1D2G48TX1E-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (X1E, RJ45)................................................... 272
7.10.18 EH1D2G48TX1E-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (X1E, RJ45)...................................................276
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

7.10.19 EH1D2G48TBC0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (BC, RJ45).....................................................279

7.10.20 ET1D2G48TX5E-48-port 100/1000BASE-T interface card (X5E, RJ45)..........................................................283
7.10.21 ET1D2G48TX5H-48-port 100/1000BASE-T interface card (X5H, RJ45).........................................................287
7.10.22 ET1D2G48TX5S-48-port 100/1000BASE-T interface card (X5S, RJ45).......................................................... 290
7.10.23 ET1D2G48SEA0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (EA, SFP)........................................................... 293
7.10.24 EH1D2G48SEA0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (EA, SFP)........................................................... 297
7.10.25 ET1D2G48SEC0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (EC, SFP)............................................................ 301
7.10.26 EH1D2G48SED0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (ED, SFP)........................................................... 305
7.10.27 EH1D2G48SFA0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (FA, SFP)............................................................ 309
7.10.28 EH1D2G48SBC0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (BC, SFP)........................................................... 313
7.10.29 ET1D2G48SX1E-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (X1E, SFP)......................................................... 318
7.10.30 EH1D2G48SX1E-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (X1E, SFP)......................................................... 322
7.10.31 ET1D2G48SX5E-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (X5E, SFP)......................................................... 326
7.10.32 ET1D2G48SX5H-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (X5H, SFP).........................................................330
7.10.33 ET1D2G48SX5S-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (X5S, SFP).......................................................... 334
7.11 GE/10GE Interface Cards......................................................................................................................................... 338
7.11.1 EH1D2T24XEA0-24-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T and 2-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA, RJ45/XFP)...... 338
7.11.2 EH1D2S24XEA0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 2-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA, SFP/XFP).............342
7.11.3 EH1D2S24XEC0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 2-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC, SFP/XFP)............. 347
7.11.4 ET1D2S04SX1E-4-Port 10GBASE-X and 24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 8-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Combo
Interface Card (X1E, RJ45/SFP/SFP+)............................................................................................................................ 351
7.11.5 EH1D2S04SX1E-4-Port 10GBASE-X and 24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 8-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Combo
7.11.6 ET1D2S04SX5E-4-port 10GE SFP+ and 44-port GE SFP interface card (X5E, SFP+)...................................... 363
7.11.7 ET1D2S08SX1E-8-Port 10GBASE-X and 8-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 8-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Combo
7.11.8 EH1D2S08SX1E-8-Port 10GBASE-X and 8-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 8-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Combo
7.11.9 ET1D2S24SX2E-24-Port 10GE SFP+ Interface and 8-Port GE SFP Interface Card (X2E, SFP+)..................... 379
7.11.10 ET1D2S24SX2S-24-Port 10GE SFP+ Interface and 8-Port GE SFP Interface Card (X2S, SFP+)....................384
7.11.11 ET1D2S16SX2E-16-Port 10GE SFP+ Interface and 16-Port GE SFP Interface Card (X2E, SFP+)..................389
7.11.12 ET1D2S16SX2S-16-Port 10GE SFP+ Interface and 16-Port GE SFP Interface Card (X2S, SFP+)..................395
7.12 10GE Interface Cards............................................................................................................................................... 400
7.12.1 EH1D2X02XEA0-2-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA, XFP)...................................................................... 400
7.12.2 EH1D2X02XEC0-2-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC, XFP)...................................................................... 403
7.12.4 ET1D2X04XEA0-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA, XFP)...................................................................... 410
7.12.5 EH1D2X04XEA0-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA, XFP)...................................................................... 413
7.12.6 ET1D2X04XEC1-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC, XFP).......................................................................416
7.12.8 ET1D2X08SX5E-8-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X5E, SFP+)................................................................... 422
7.12.9 ET1D2X08SX5H-8-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X5H, SFP+)...................................................................426
7.12.10 EH1D2X04XEC1-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC, XFP).................................................................... 430
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

7.12.11 EH1D2X04XED0-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (ED, XFP).................................................................... 434

7.12.12 EH1D2X08SED4-8-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (ED, SFP+)................................................................... 437
7.12.13 EH1D2X08SED5-8-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (ED, SFP+)................................................................... 441
7.12.14 ET1D2X12SSA0-12-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SA, SFP+)..................................................................444
7.12.15 EH1D2X12SSA0-12-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SA, SFP+)................................................................. 448
7.12.16 ET1D2X16SSC0-16-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SC, SFP+).................................................................. 451
7.12.17 EH1D2X16SFC0-16-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (FC, SFP+)..................................................................455
7.12.19 EH1D2X16SSC2-16-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SC, SFP+)..................................................................464
7.12.21 EH1D2X32SSC0-32-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SC, SFP+)..................................................................473
7.12.22 ET1D2X32SX2E-32-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X2E, SFP+)............................................................... 477
7.12.23 ET1D2X32SX2S-32-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X2S, SFP+)................................................................482
7.12.24 ET1D2X32SX2H-32-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X2H, SFP+)...............................................................486
7.12.25 EH1D2X40SFC0-40-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (FC, SFP+)..................................................................490
7.12.26 ET1D2X48SEC0-48-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC, SFP+)..................................................................495
7.12.27 EH1D2X48SEC0-48-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC, SFP+)................................................................. 500
7.12.28 ET1D2X48SX2S-48-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X2S, SFP+)................................................................505
7.13 40GE Interface Cards............................................................................................................................................... 509
7.13.1 ET1D2L02QSC0-2-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (SC, QSFP+)................................................................... 509
7.13.2 EH1D2L02QFC0-2-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (FC, QSFP+)...................................................................514
7.13.3 ET1D2L08QSC0-8-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (SC, QSFP+)................................................................... 519
7.13.4 EH1D2L08QFC0-8-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (FC, QSFP+)...................................................................524
7.13.5 EH1D2L08QX2E-8-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (X2E, QSFP+)................................................................ 529
7.14 40GE/100GE Interface Cards................................................................................................................................... 534
7.14.1 ET1D2H02QX2S-2-Port 100GE QSFP28 Interface and 2-Port 40GE QSFP+ Interface Card (X2S, QSFP28).. 534
7.14.2 ET1D2H02QX2E-2-Port 100GE QSFP28 Interface and 2-Port 40GE QSFP+ Interface Card (X2E, QSFP28). 538
7.15 100GE Interface Cards............................................................................................................................................. 542
7.15.1 ET1D2C02FEE0-2-Port 100GBASE-X Interface Card (EE, CFP)...................................................................... 542
7.15.2 EH1D2C02FEE0-2-Port 100GBASE-X Interface Card (EE, CFP)...................................................................... 546
7.15.3 ET1D2C04HX2E-4-Port 100GE QSFP28 Interface Card (X2E, QSFP28)..........................................................550
7.15.4 ET1D2C04HX2S-4-Port 100GE QSFP28 Interface Card (X2S, QSFP28).......................................................... 553
7.16 POS Interface Card................................................................................................................................................... 557
7.16.1 EH1D2WM00000 - WAN Interface Service Process Card................................................................................... 557
7.16.2 P1UF-1-Port OC-48c/STM-16c POS-SFP Flexible Card..................................................................................... 560
7.16.3 P4HF-4-Port OC-12c/STM-4c POS-SFP Flexible Card....................................................................................... 564
7.16.4 P4CF-4-Port OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP Flexible Card......................................................................................... 568
7.17 User Manuals For ACU2, NGFW Module, and IPS Module (S9700).....................................................................572
8 Cables...........................................................................................................................................575
8.1 DC Power Cable......................................................................................................................................................... 575
8.2 AC Power Cable......................................................................................................................................................... 576
8.3 Ground Cable..............................................................................................................................................................579
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

8.4 Console Cable.............................................................................................................................................................580

8.5 Clock Cable................................................................................................................................................................ 581
8.6 Ethernet Cable............................................................................................................................................................ 583
8.7 High-Speed Cable.......................................................................................................................................................585
8.8 Optical Fiber............................................................................................................................................................... 589
9 Pluggable Modules for Interfaces.......................................................................................... 606

9.1 Important Notes About Using Optical Modules Certified for Huawei Switches....................................................... 607
9.1.1 How to Identify Huawei-Certified Switch Optical Modules...................................................................................607
9.1.2 Risks of Using Non-Huawei-Certified Switch Optical Modules............................................................................ 608
9.2 Understanding Optical Modules................................................................................................................................. 609
9.2.1 What Is an Optical Module......................................................................................................................................609
9.2.2 Types of Optical Modules........................................................................................................................................615
9.2.3 Parameter Description............................................................................................................................................. 616
9.2.4 How to View Optical Module Parameters............................................................................................................... 617
9.2.5 Rules for Optical Module Interoperation.................................................................................................................618
9.3 Understanding Copper Modules................................................................................................................................. 620
9.4 FE SFP/eSFP Optical Modules...................................................................................................................................621
9.4.1 SFP-FE-SX-MM1310..............................................................................................................................................621
9.4.2 eSFP-FE-LX-SM1310............................................................................................................................................. 622
9.4.3 S-SFP-FE-LH40-SM1310....................................................................................................................................... 622
9.4.4 S-SFP-FE-LH80-SM1550....................................................................................................................................... 623
9.4.5 SFP-FE-LX-SM1310-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module).......................................................................... 624
9.4.6 SFP-FE-LX-SM1550-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module).......................................................................... 624
9.5 GE eSFP Optical Modules..........................................................................................................................................625
9.5.1 eSFP-GE-SX-MM850............................................................................................................................................. 625
9.5.2 SFP-GE-LX-SM1310.............................................................................................................................................. 626
9.5.3 S-SFP-GE-LH40-SM1310.......................................................................................................................................627
9.5.4 S-SFP-GE-LH40-SM1550.......................................................................................................................................627
9.5.5 S-SFP-GE-LH80-SM1550.......................................................................................................................................628
9.5.6 eSFP-GE-ZX100-SM1550...................................................................................................................................... 629
9.5.7 SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)......................................................................... 629
9.5.8 SFP-GE-LX-SM1490-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)......................................................................... 630
9.5.9 LE2MGSC40DE0 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)........................................................................................ 631
9.5.10 LE2MGSC40ED0 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)...................................................................................... 631
9.5.11 SFP-GE-ZBXD1 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module).........................................................................................632
9.5.12 SFP-GE-ZBXU1 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)........................................................................................ 633
9.5.13 SFP-GE-BXU1-SC (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module).....................................................................................634
9.6 POS eSFP Optical Modules........................................................................................................................................634
9.6.1 eSFP-SM1310-155M-2.5G-15km........................................................................................................................... 634
9.6.2 eSFP-1310nm-L-16.1.............................................................................................................................................. 635
9.6.3 eSFP-1550nm-L-16.2.............................................................................................................................................. 636
9.7 GE-CWDM eSFP Optical Modules........................................................................................................................... 637
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

9.7.1 CWDM-SFPGE-1471..............................................................................................................................................637
9.7.2 CWDM-SFPGE-1491..............................................................................................................................................637
9.7.3 CWDM-SFPGE-1511..............................................................................................................................................638
9.7.4 CWDM-SFPGE-1531..............................................................................................................................................639
9.7.5 CWDM-SFPGE-1551..............................................................................................................................................639
9.7.6 CWDM-SFPGE-1571..............................................................................................................................................640
9.7.7 CWDM-SFPGE-1591..............................................................................................................................................641
9.7.8 CWDM-SFPGE-1611..............................................................................................................................................641
9.8 GE-DWDM eSFP Optical Modules........................................................................................................................... 642
9.8.1 DWDM-SFPGE-1560-61........................................................................................................................................ 642
9.9 GE SFP Copper Modules........................................................................................................................................... 642
9.9.1 SFP-1000BaseT....................................................................................................................................................... 643
9.10 10GE SFP+ Optical Modules................................................................................................................................... 643
9.10.1 SFP-10G-USR....................................................................................................................................................... 643
9.10.2 OSXD22N00......................................................................................................................................................... 644
9.10.3 OMXD30000......................................................................................................................................................... 644
9.10.4 SFP-10G-iLR.........................................................................................................................................................645
9.10.5 OSX010000........................................................................................................................................................... 646
9.10.6 OSX040N01.......................................................................................................................................................... 646
9.10.7 SFP-10G-ER-1310.................................................................................................................................................647
9.10.8 SFP-10G-ZR.......................................................................................................................................................... 648
9.10.9 SFP-10G-BXU1 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)......................................................................................... 648
9.10.10 SFP-10G-BXD1 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)....................................................................................... 649
9.10.11 SFP-10G-ER-SM1330-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module).................................................................... 650
9.10.12 SFP-10G-ER-SM1270-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module).................................................................... 651
9.11 10GE-CWDM SFP+ Optical Modules..................................................................................................................... 651
9.11.1 SFP-10G-ZCW1471.............................................................................................................................................. 651
9.11.2 SFP-10G-ZCW1491.............................................................................................................................................. 652
9.11.3 SFP-10G-ZCW1511.............................................................................................................................................. 653
9.11.4 SFP-10G-ZCW1531.............................................................................................................................................. 653
9.11.5 SFP-10G-ZCW1551.............................................................................................................................................. 654
9.11.6 SFP-10G-ZCW1571.............................................................................................................................................. 655
9.11.7 SFP-10G-ZCW1591.............................................................................................................................................. 655
9.11.8 SFP-10G-ZCW1611.............................................................................................................................................. 656
9.12 10GE-DWDM SFP+ Optical Modules.....................................................................................................................657
9.12.1 SFP-10G-ZDWT................................................................................................................................................... 657
9.13 10GE XFP Optical Modules.....................................................................................................................................657
9.13.1 XFP-SX-MM850................................................................................................................................................... 657
9.13.2 XFP-STM64-LX-SM1310.....................................................................................................................................658
9.13.3 XFP-STM64-LH40-SM1550.................................................................................................................................659
9.13.4 XFP-STM64-SM1550-80km.................................................................................................................................660
9.14 10GE-CWDM XFP Optical Modules.......................................................................................................................660
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

9.14.1 CWDM-XFP10G-1471......................................................................................................................................... 660

9.14.2 CWDM-XFP10G-1491......................................................................................................................................... 661
9.14.3 CWDM-XFP10G-1511..........................................................................................................................................662
9.14.4 CWDM-XFP10G-1531......................................................................................................................................... 662
9.14.5 CWDM-XFP10G-1551......................................................................................................................................... 663
9.14.6 CWDM-XFP10G-1571......................................................................................................................................... 663
9.14.7 CWDM-XFP10G-1591......................................................................................................................................... 664
9.14.8 CWDM-XFP10G-1611..........................................................................................................................................665
9.15 10GE-DWDM XFP Optical Modules...................................................................................................................... 665
9.15.1 DWDM-XFP10G-1533-47.................................................................................................................................... 665
9.15.2 DWDM-XFP10G-1534-25.................................................................................................................................... 666
9.15.3 DWDM-XFP10G-1535-04.................................................................................................................................... 667
9.15.4 DWDM-XFP10G-1552-52.................................................................................................................................... 667
9.15.5 DWDM-XFP10G-1553-33.................................................................................................................................... 668
9.15.6 DWDM-XFP10G-1554-13.................................................................................................................................... 669
9.15.7 DWDM-XFP10G-1530-33.................................................................................................................................... 669
9.15.8 DWDM-XFP10G-1549-32.................................................................................................................................... 670
9.15.9 DWDM-XFP10G-1531-12.................................................................................................................................... 671
9.15.10 DWDM-XFP10G-1531-90.................................................................................................................................. 671
9.15.11 DWDM-XFP10G-1550-12.................................................................................................................................. 672
9.15.12 DWDM-XFP10G-1550-92.................................................................................................................................. 672
9.15.13 DWDM-XFP10G-1532-68.................................................................................................................................. 673
9.15.14 DWDM-XFP10G-1551-72.................................................................................................................................. 674
9.15.15 DWDM-XFP10G-1529-55.................................................................................................................................. 674
9.15.16 DWDM-XFP10G-1548-51.................................................................................................................................. 675
9.16 40GE QSFP+ Optical Modules................................................................................................................................ 676
9.16.1 QSFP-40G-SR4..................................................................................................................................................... 676
9.16.2 QSFP-40G-iSR4.................................................................................................................................................... 676
9.16.3 QSFP-40G-eSR4................................................................................................................................................... 677
9.16.4 QSFP-40G-iSM4................................................................................................................................................... 678
9.16.5 QSFP-40G-eSM4...................................................................................................................................................679
9.16.6 QSFP-40G-LX4.....................................................................................................................................................680
9.16.7 QSFP-40G-LR4..................................................................................................................................................... 680
9.16.8 QSFP-40G-ER4..................................................................................................................................................... 681
9.16.9 QSFP-40G-SR-BD................................................................................................................................................ 682
9.16.10 QSFP-40G-SDLC-PAM...................................................................................................................................... 682
9.16.11 QSFP-40G-eSDLC-PAM.....................................................................................................................................683
9.17 40GE CFP Optical Modules..................................................................................................................................... 684
9.17.1 CFP-40G-SR4........................................................................................................................................................684
9.17.2 CFP-40G-LR4....................................................................................................................................................... 685
9.17.3 CFP-40G-ER4....................................................................................................................................................... 685
9.17.4 CFP-40G-ZR4....................................................................................................................................................... 686
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

9.18 100GE CFP Optical Modules................................................................................................................................... 687

9.18.1 CFP-100G-SR10....................................................................................................................................................687
9.18.2 CFP-100G-LR4..................................................................................................................................................... 687
9.18.3 CFP-100G-ER4..................................................................................................................................................... 688
9.19 100GE QSFP28 Optical Modules.............................................................................................................................689
9.19.1 QSFP28-100G-LR4............................................................................................................................................... 689
9.19.2 QSFP28-100G-10KM............................................................................................................................................690
9.19.3 QSFP28-100G-PSM4............................................................................................................................................ 690
9.19.4 QSFP28-100G-SR4............................................................................................................................................... 691
9.19.5 QSFP-100G-eSR4................................................................................................................................................. 691
9.19.6 QSFP-100G-CLR4................................................................................................................................................ 692
9.19.7 QSFP-100G-CWDM4........................................................................................................................................... 693
9.19.8 QSFP-100G-ER4-Lite........................................................................................................................................... 693
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

S9700 Series Terabit Core Routing Switches 1 Using the Hardware Query Tool and the Hardware
Hardware Description Configuration Tool
1 Using the Hardware Query Tool and the

Hardware Configuration Tool
Figure 1-1 shows the interface of the Hardware Query Tool. You can use this tool to query
the power modules, fan modules, optical modules, and cards supported by each switch model,
as well as specifications of switches and modules. You can search switch products or modules
by part number, product model, or module type.
Figure 1-1 Web page of the Hardware Query Tool
Figure 1-2 shows the web page of the Hardware Configuration Tool. You can use this tool
to calculate the power consumption of a switch.
NOTE
The heat consumption of a device can be calculated as follows based on its power consumption:
Heat consumption (BTUs per hour) = Power consumption (W) x 3.412
Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

S9700 Series Terabit Core Routing Switches 1 Using the Hardware Query Tool and the Hardware
Hardware Description Configuration Tool
Figure 1-2 Web page of the Hardware Configuration Tool

Hardware Description 2 Version Requirements for Components
2 Version Requirements for Components
NOTE
l This document describes all the device models and modules supported in a version. To obtain
accurate subscription information, visit http://e.huawei.com or contact Huawei local sales offices.
You can also pay attention to the product change notices (PCNs) and lifecycle management bulletins
on this website.
l The figures in this document are for reference only.

Hardware Description 3 Cabinets
3 Cabinets
About This Chapter
3.1 N66E Cabinet

3.2 N68E Cabinet
3.1 N66E Cabinet
3.1.1 Appearance of an N66E Cabinet

Figure 3-1 shows an N66E cabinet. An N66E cabinet complies with the Dimensions of
Mechanical Structures of the 482.6 mm (19 Inch) Series (IEC 60297-2 Standard). It uses a
modular structure, which facilitates expansion and maintenance. The surface of the cabinet
and the rack is NC purplish grey.

Figure 3-1 N66E cabinet
3.1.2 Specifications of an N66E Cabinet

Table 3-1 lists specifications of an N66E cabinet.
Table 3-1 N66E cabinet specifications
Item Specification
Empty cabinet weight 73 kg±1 kg

NOTE
Empty cabinet weight is the weight of a cabinet
with a front door, a rear door, and two side
panels.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 600 mm x 600 mm x 2200 mm
24 in. x 24 in. x 87 in.
Mounting holes on the top l Position (W x D): 450 mm x 400 mm

l Nuts: six M8 weld nuts

Item Specification
Mounting holes on the bottom l Position (W x D): 413 mm x 487 mm

l Hole diameter: φ18 (four holes)
l Nuts: four M12 expansion bolts and
matching nuts
Available space 46 U
Angle opening width 450 mm
Space for a chassis (distance between axes 465 mm

of mounting holes)
Distance between a front mounting rail and 95 mm

interior of the front door
Figure 3-2 shows the dimensions of an N66E cabinet.

Figure 3-2 N66E cabinet dimensions

3.1.3 Components of an N66E Cabinet

N66E cabinets are classified into front-serviceable cabinets and rear-serviceable cabinets.
Figure 3-3 shows the components of a rear-serviceable cabinet. An N66E cabinet consists of
a front door, a rear door, two side panels and a rack.
Figure 3-3 Components of a rear-serviceable N66E cabinet

3
1. Front door 2. Rack 3. Rear door 4. Side panels
3.1.4 Structural Features of an N66E Cabinet
Cabinet Material
An N66E cabinet is made of welded electro-galvanized steel sheets and cold-rolled steel
sheets. The fireproof performance of the internal materials complies with the Underwriter
Laboratories (UL) standards.

Cabling Mode
Cable apertures are reserved on the top and at the bottom of the N66E cabinet, so that the
N66E cabinet supports overhead cabling and underfloor cabling. The following describe the
two cabling modes:
l In the overhead cabling mode, external cables enter the cabinet through the top of the
cabinet. Figure 3-4 shows the cable apertures.
l In the underfloor cabling mode, external cables enter the cabinet through the bottom of
the cabinet.
NOTE
The devices described in this document use the overhead cabling mode.
Figure 3-4 Cable apertures on the cabinet top

52mm 52mm
Network Network
cable/fiber cable/fiber
175mm×22mm
Reserved holes
500mm 500mm
Power cable hole

Power cable
Front Door
Heat Dissipation
The front door, rear door, and top plate of an N66E cabinet have high-density air vents.
Therefore, the cabinet supports front air intake, rear air exhaust, and upper air exhaust, and
provides good heat dissipation performance.
NOTE
l The devices described in this document adopt left-to-back airflow for heat dissipation and have fans
installed at the rear of the chassis.
l The airflow of devices described in this document in the cabinet is: front of the cabinet -> left side of
the device -> inside the device -> rear of the device -> rear of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 Airflow in the cabinet
Protection Performance
The protection performance of an N66E cabinet is described as follows:
l The cabinet design takes full account of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) to ensure
an excellent electromagnetic shielding performance.
l The air vents on the bottom plate of the cabinet have air filters installed, which enhance
the dust-proof capability of the N66E cabinet.
l The grounding resistance of the N66E cabinet does not exceed 0.1 ohm.
ESD Jack
When wearing an ESD wrist strap, connect the connector of the wrist strap to the ESD jack in
the middle of the N66E cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 ESD jack on the N66E cabinet
Installation Scenarios
An N66E cabinet can be installed on:
l Concrete floor
l ESD floor, in which case the N6X series supports are required
Cabinet Combination
N66E cabinets can be installed side by side. When installing N66E cabinets side by side,
connect them using connecting plates, as shown in Figure 3-7. Connecting plates are
delivered with the cabinet.
Figure 3-7 Combined N66E cabinets

3.2 N68E Cabinet
3.2.1 Appearance of an N68E Cabinet

Figure 3-8 shows the appearance of an N68E cabinet. An N68E cabinet complies with the
Dimensions of Mechanical Structures of the 482.6 mm (19 Inch) Series (IEC 60297-2
Standard). It uses a modular structure, which facilitates expansion and maintenance. The
surface of the cabinet and the rack is NC purple grey.
Figure 3-8 Appearance of an N68E cabinet
3.2.2 Specifications of an N68E Cabinet

Table 3-2 lists specifications of an N68E cabinet.

Table 3-2 N68E cabinet specifications

Item Specification
Empty cabinet weight 100 kg

NOTE
Empty cabinet weight is the weight of a cabinet
with a front door, a rear door, and two side
panels.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 600 mm x 800 mm x 2200 mm
24 in. x 31 in. x 87 in.
Mounting holes on the top l Position (W x D): 450 mm x 750 mm

l Nuts: 16 M8 self-clinching nuts
Mounting holes on the bottom l Position (W x D): 413 mm x 687 mm

l Hole diameter: φ18 (four holes)
l Nuts: four M12 expansion bolts and
matching nuts
Available space 46 U
Angle opening width 450 mm
Space for a chassis (distance between axes 465 mm

of mounting holes)
Distance between a front mounting rail and 100 mm

interior of the front door
Figure 3-9 shows the dimensions of an N68E cabinet.

Figure 3-9 N68E cabinet dimensions

3.2.3 Components of an N68E cabinet
Figure 3-10 shows the structure of an N68E cabinet. An N68E cabinet consists of a front
door, a rear door, two side panels, and a rack.
Figure 3-10 Structure of the N68E cabinet
33 4
4
22
11
3
3
1. Front door 2. Rear door 3. Side panels 4. Rack
3.2.4 Structural Features of an N68E Cabinet
Cabinet Material
The N68E cabinet is made of electro-galvanized steel sheets and cold-rolled steel sheets
assembled by screws. The fireproof performance of internal materials complies with the
standards of the Underwriter Laboratories (UL).
Cabling Mode
Cable apertures are reserved on the top and at the bottom of the N68E cabinet, so that the
N68E cabinet supports overhead cabling and underfloor cabling. The following describe the
two cabling modes:

l In the overhead cabling mode, external cables enter the cabinet through the top of the
cabinet. Figure 3-11 shows the cable apertures.
l In the underfloor cabling mode, external cables enter the cabinet through the bottom of
the cabinet.
NOTE
The devices described in this document use the overhead cabling mode.
Figure 3-11 Cable apertures on the cabinet top

52mm 52mm
Network Network
cable/fiber cable/fiber
312mm 312mm
130mm×15mm 130mm×15mm
312mm 312mm
145mm×65mm 145mm×65mm
Reserved holes
Power cable
Front Door
ESD Jack
Before installing the N68E cabinet, wear an ESD wrist strap and insert connector of the ESD
wrist strap into the ESD jack in the middle of the N68E cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 ESD jack in the middle of the N68E cabinet
Heat Dissipation
The front door, rear door, and top plate of the N68E cabinet have high-density air vents.
Therefore, the N68E cabinet supports front air intake, rear air exhaust, and upper air exhaust
and provides good heat dissipation performance.
NOTE
l The devices described in this document adopt left-to-back airflow for heat dissipation and have fans
installed at the rear of chassis.
l The airflow of devices described in this document in the cabinet is: front of the cabinet -> left side of
the equipment -> inside the equipment -> rear of the equipment -> rear of the cabinet, as shown in
Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Airflow in the cabinet
Protection Performance
The protection performance of an N68E cabinet is described as follows:
l The cabinet design takes full account of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) to ensure
an excellent electromagnetic shielding performance.
l The air vents on the bottom plate of the cabinet have air filters installed, which enhance
the dust-proof capability of the N68E cabinet.
l The grounding resistance of the N68E cabinet does not exceed 0.1 ohm.
Installation Scenarios
An N68E cabinet can be installed on:

l Concrete floor
l ESD floor, in which case the N6X series supports are required
Cabinet Combination
N68E cabinets can be installed side by side. When installing N68E cabinets side by side,
connect them using connecting plates, as shown in Figure 3-14. Connecting plates are
delivered with the cabinet.
Figure 3-14 Combined N68E cabinets

Hardware Description 4 Chassis
4 Chassis
About This Chapter
Table 4-1 S9700 Chassis models

Chassis Description
Model
S9703 Supports two Main Control Units (MCUs), three Line Processing Units
(LPUs), and AC or DC power modules in N+N/N+1/N+0 (no
redundancy) backup mode.
S9706 Supports two Switching and Routing Units (SRUs), six LPUs, and AC
or DC power modules in N+N/N+1/N+0 (no redundancy) backup mode.
S9712 Supports two SRUs, twelve LPUs, and AC or DC power modules in N

+N/N+1/N+0 (no redundancy) backup mode.
NOTE
S9700 chassis include FCC-certified chassis and common chassis.
4.1 S9703
4.2 S9706
4.3 S9712
4.1 S9703

Version Mapping
Table 4-2 Mapping between the S9703 chassis and software versions
Chassis Version
S9703 chassis V200R001C00 to V200R013C00 versions
S9703 chassis, FCC certified V200R001C00 to V200R013C00 versions
Appearance and Structure

NOTE
The figures in this document are for reference only.
The S9703 chassis is 4 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm). When the chassis has no cable management
frame installed, the dimensions are 442 mm x 489 mm x 175 mm (W x D x H). When the
chassis has cable management frames installed, the dimensions are 442 mm x 585 mm x 175
mm (W x D x H). Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 show the S9703 chassis.
Figure 4-1 S9703 chassis (front view)
RUN/ALM S9703
03
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
44 45
42 43
40 41 RUN/ALM
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
26 27
28 29
30 31
02
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 RUN/ALM
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
28 29
30 31
32 33
01
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45 04
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 05
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
EH1D2MCUAC00
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27 ACT RUN/ALM
24 25 RST
22 23 ETH
20 21
16 17
18 19 CONSOLE
14 15 MON
12 13 RS485
EH1D2 MCUAC00
10 11 CLK2
EH1D2
8
EH1D2MCUAC00
9 CLK1
G48TEA0
6 7
4 5
FAULT
2 3
1 RUN/ALM
ALM
RUN
RST ACT
ETH
CONSOLE
MON
RS485
FAULT
OFF
EH1D2 MCUAC00
CLK2
ALM
CLK1
RUN
ON
≤25
kg（55
lb）
P
W
OFF
R
2
ON
P
W
R
1
Figure 4-2 S9703 chassis (rear view)

Clean periodically
ᇐᵕ␻ᢡ
fingers
keeping
moving parts,
Hazardous
away.
body parts
and other ਬ⡽έ
᧛䀜
᡽ᰁ䖢ᰬ
ћ⾷൞伄
RUN/ALM
≤25
kg（55
lb）

NOTE
The S9703 chassis include FCC-certified chassis and common chassis.
Figure 4-3 shows the front structure of the S9703 chassis.
Figure 4-3 S9703 chassis structure (front view)

RUN/ALM
S9703
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
03
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
02
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
7
EH1D2
EH1D2
01
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
EH1D2
EH1D2
EH1D2
EH1D2
2 2
04
MCUA00
MCUA00
MCUA00
MCUA00
SYNC
RST
ACT RUN/ALM SYNC
RST
ACT RUN/ALM 05
CLK1 CLK2 RS485 MON CONSOLE ETH CLK1 CLK2 RS485 MON CONSOLE ETH
FAULT
FAULT
RUN
RUN
ALM
ALM
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A 100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
P
W
OFF P
W
6
OFF
R R
ON
ON
3
1 2
3
4 5
1. Three of the following service cards can 2. Two MPUs 3. A pair of mounting
be installed: brackets
l Value-Added Service Unit NOTE
l Open Service Platform Unit The mounting brackets are used

to secure the chassis in the
l 100M Interface Card cabinet.
l 1000M Interface Card
l GE/10GE Interface Card
l 10GE Interface Card
l 40GE/100GE Interface Card
NOTE
The cards supported by a switch depend on the
software version. For details, see Hardware
Query Tool.
4. Two power modules 5. Reserved 6. Front ESD jack

slot
NOTE NOTE
Install a filler The ground terminal of an ESD

panel in the wrist strap can be inserted into
reserved slot. this jack. The ESD wrist strap
can provide ESD protection
when the chassis is reliably
grounded.
7. Cable management frames - -

NOTE
Cable management frames are used to route
cables.
Figure 4-4 shows the rear structure of the S9703 chassis.

Figure 4-4 S9703 chassis structure (rear view)
Hazardous moving parts, keeping fingers

and other body parts away.
Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ䕀ᯊ᥹㾺৊⠛ʽ
4
1
RUN/ALM
3 2
1. One 6 Fan Module 2. Rear ESD jack 3. JG ground terminal

NOTE NOTE
The ground terminal of an ESD wrist strap
The JG ground terminal
can be inserted into this jack. The ESD
is used to ground the
wrist strap can provide ESD protection
chassis.
when the chassis is reliably grounded.
4. Air filter - -
NOTE
The air filter prevents dust
from entering the chassis.
Related Content
Interactive 3D views
Slot Configuration on the Chassis

The S9703 chassis provides 3 LPU slots, 2 MCU slots, and 2 power supply slots.
Figure 4-5 shows the slot layout at the front of the S9703 chassis, and Figure 4-6 shows the
slot layout at the rear of the S9703 chassis.
Figure 4-5 Slot layout on the S9703 chassis (front)
SLOT03-LPU
SLOT02-LPU
SLOT01-LPU
SLOT04-MCU SLOT05-MCU
PWR1 PWR2

Figure 4-6 Slot layout on the S9703 chassis (rear)
FAN1
Table 4-3 describes the slot configuration in a chassis.
Table 4-3 S9703 slot configuration

Slot Type Slot ID Module Remarks
Supported
MCU slot SLOT04 and MPUs The MCUs work in

SLOT05 active/standby
mode.
LPU slot SLOT01 to SLOT03 l Value-Added NOTE

Service Unit The cards supported
by a switch depend
l Open Service on the software
Platform Unit version. For details,
see 2 Version
l 100M Interface Requirements for
Card Components.
l 1000M Interface
Card
l GE/10GE
Interface Card
l 10GE Interface
Card
l 40GE Interface
Card
l 40GE/100GE
Interface Card
l 100GE Interface
Card
Power slot PWR1 and PWR2 power modules -
Fan module slot FAN1 6 Fan Module -

Power Supply Slot Configuration

NOTE
If a switch is running a version prior to V200R010C00, it does not allow combining the use of AC and DC
power modules or power modules of different wattages. If the switch is running V200R010C00 or a later
version, it allows combining the use of 2200 W AC and DC power modules. If the switch is running
V200R012C00 or a later version, it allows combining the use of 2200 W AC, 2200 W DC, and 3000 W AC
power modules.
The S9703 provides slots PWR1 and PWR2 for DC or AC power modules, as shown in Slot
layout on the S9703 chassis (front).
The S9703 series switches support two redundancy modes of power modules: N+N, and N+0.
The value of N depends on the maximum power actually required by the system. Ensure that
the total maximum output power of N power modules (N x maximum output power of each
power module) is larger than the maximum power actually required by the system. For
example, the maximum power required by the system is 4000 W. If two 2200 W power
modules are installed in the chassis, they work in 2+0 mode. The system can identify the
power redundancy mode, and you do not need to manually configure the power redundancy
mode. Table 4-4 describes the three power redundancy modes and the specific redundancy
modes supported by the S9703 series switches.
Table 4-4 Description of power redundancy modes

Redundancy Description Product Support
Mode
N+N l System power supply is not affected if no 1+1 redundancy

more than N power modules are removed or
fail.
l The maximum output power of the system is
the total maximum output power of N power
modules.
l The first N represents mandatory power
modules, and the second N represents
optional power modules.
NOTE
The N+N redundancy mode is often used when two
power supply systems are available. In this case, the
first N represents mandatory power modules for the
first power supply system, and the second N
represents mandatory power modules for the second
power supply system. The use of double power
supply systems provides redundancy for both power
modules and power supply systems.
N+0 (no l System power supply is affected once any 1+0, and 2+0
redundancy) power module is removed or fails.
l The maximum output power of the system is
the total maximum output power of N power
modules.
l N power modules are mandatory, and there
are no optional power modules.

NOTE
l When using the N+N redundancy mode, equally divide the power modules into two groups and
connect the two groups of power modules to two independent power supply systems. This
configuration provides redundancy of power supply systems to enhance system reliability.
l When using the N+N redundancy mode, you are advised to install N power modules (as specified by
the first N) in the power supply slots at the left side and install N power modules (as specified by the
second N) in the power supply slots at the right side. Power slots are marked PWR.
l If the system power consumption exceeds 50% of a single power module's power, all power modules
equally share the power consumption. This reduces the load of a single power module and improves
the system reliability.
The following describes the power module configuration for an S9703 switch with different
power supplies:
l If DC power input is provided, configure power modules according to DC power input.

l If 220 V single-phase AC input or 110 V dual-live-wire AC input is provided, configure
power modules according to AC power input (220 V single-phase or 110 V dual-live-
wire input).
l If 110 V single-live-wire AC input is provided, configure power modules according to
AC power input (110 V single-live-wire input).
DC power input
Table 4-5 describes the power module configuration for the S9703 series switches when DC
power input is provided.
Table 4-5 Power module configuration (DC power input)
Power Module Type Redundancy Maximum Output Power

Mode
2200 W DC power module N+N A maximum of 2 (1+1) 2200 W DC

power modules can be configured,
providing a maximum output power of
2200 W.
N+0 (no A maximum of 2 (2+0) 2200 W DC

redundancy) power modules can be configured,
4400 W.
AC power input (220 V single-phase or 110 V dual-live-wire input)
NOTE
If the input voltage is 110 V, the dual-live-wire input mode is recommended. In this case, the maximum
output power of a 3000 W AC power module is 3000 W, the maximum output power of a 2200 W AC
power module is 2200 W, and the maximum output power of an 800 W AC power module is 800 W.
Table 4-6 describes the power module configuration for the S9703 series switches when 220
V single-phase or 110 V dual-live-wire AC power input is provided.

Table 4-6 Power module configuration (220 V single-phase or 110 V dual-live-wire AC

power input)
Mode
3000 W AC power module N+N A maximum of 2 (1+1) 3000 W AC

3000 W.
N+0 (no A maximum of 2 (2+0) 3000 W AC

4400 W.

2200 W.

4400 W.

800 W.

1600 W.
AC power input (110 V single-live-wire input)
NOTE
When 110 V single-live-wire AC power input is provided, the maximum output power of a 3000 W AC
power module is 1500 W, the maximum output power of a 2200 W AC power module is 1100 W, and
the maximum output power of an 800 W AC power module is 400 W. In this case, it is recommended
that you use the N+1 or N+0 redundancy mode to increase the maximum output power of the system.
V single-live-wire AC power input is provided.

Table 4-7 Power module configuration (110 V single-live-wire AC power input is provided)
Mode

1500 W.

3000 W.

1100 W.

2200 W.

400 W.

800 W.
Heat Dissipation
NOTE
It is recommended that you replace the air filter of a device every six months.
The S9703 cooling system consists of fan modules and air filters. A fan module is located
behind the air exhaust vent (rear of the chassis), and an air filter is located outside the air
intake vent (left side of the chassis).
l The S9703 has one fan module, located at the rear of the chassis. The fan module draws
cold air into the chassis to dissipate heat generated by working components, ensuring
that the chassis operates within a normal temperature range. For details about the
performance and attributes of a fan module, see 6 Fan Module.
l The air filter prevents dust from entering the chassis with the airflow.
Airflow
NOTE
The S9703, S9706, and S9712 use the same airflow design.

The S9703 chassis uses a left-to-back airflow design. Cold air is drawn into the chassis from
the left side, dissipates heat in the chassis, and is exhausted from the rear of the chassis.
Figure 4-7 shows the airflow in the chassis.
Figure 4-7 Airflow in the chassis
RUN/ALM
06
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
44 45
42 43
40 41 RUN/ALM
S9706
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
28 29
30 31 05
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
2
4 5 38 39
40 41 RUN/ALM
3 36 37
1
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 04
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 ETH 08
EH1D2
24 25 CON
SRUDC00
22 23 M
20 21 CLK2 ACT RUN/AL
18 19 CLK1
16 17
14 15
12 13 RST
10 11
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6 7 SYNC
4 5
2 3
1
ETH 07
EH1D2
CON
SRUDC00
M
CLK2 ACT RUN/AL
CLK1
RST
EH1D2
SRUDC00
SYNC RUN/ALM
03
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
EH1D2
44 45
42 43
SRUDC00
40 41 RUN/ALM
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
24 25
26 27 02
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 40 41
2 3
5 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 01
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
EH1D2
8 4647
9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17 CMU
14 15
12 13
10 11 PWR4
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6 7
2 3
4 5 PWR3
1
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM
PWR1
ACT
ACT
MON
MON
≤45
kg（99
lb）
RS485
RS485
CMUA
CMUA
ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ALM 2
ON
RUN 1
ON ALM
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF
Air Filter
NOTE
The switches may use honeycomb air filters or non-honeycomb air filters. The switches with
honeycomb air filters installed in all air filter slots comply with Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) standards.
The S9703 uses either a sponge air filter or a honeycomb air filter. An FCC-certified chassis
must use a honeycomb air filter. Figure 4-8 shows a sponge air filter, and Figure 4-9 shows a
honeycomb air filter.

Figure 4-8 Sponge air filter

Figure 4-9 Honeycomb air filter
Specifications
Table 4-8 S9703 chassis specifications

Item Description
LPU slots 3
MCU slots 2
Fan slots 1
Power slots 2

Item Description
Maximum port density l V200R001C00: 144xFE, 144xGE,

120x10GE
l V200R002C00 and V200R003C00:
144xFE, 144xGE, 120x10GE, 24x40GE
l V200R005C00 to V200R007C10:
144xFE, 144xGE, 144x10GE, 24x40GE
l V200R008C00 to V200R009C00:
144xFE, 144xGE, 144x10GE, 24x40GE,
6x100GE
l V200R010C00 to V200R013C00:
144xFE, 144xGE, 144x10GE, 24x40GE,
12x100GE
Installation In an N66E or N68E cabinet
CSS Not supported
Maximum power consumption (fully 1185 W

loaded)
NOTE
The heat dissipation value of a chassis equals the
current power consumption of the chassis.
Power specifications l DC input voltage

Rated voltage: -48 V DC/-60 V DC
Maximum voltage range: -40 V DC to
-72 V DC
l AC input voltage
Rated voltage: 110 V AC/220 V AC,
50/60 Hz
Maximum voltage range: 90 V AC to
290 V AC; 47 Hz to 63 Hz (The output
power reduces to half of the maximum
output when the input voltage is in the
range of 90 V AC to 175 V AC.)
l HVDC input voltage (3000 W AC)
Rated voltage: 240 V DC
Maximum voltage range: 190 V DC to
290 V DC
Dimensions (W x D x H, excluding rack- l With cable management frames: 442 mm

mounting brackets) x 585 mm x 175 mm (17.4 in. x 23.0 in.
x 6.89 in. (4 U))
l Without cable management frames: 442
mm x 489 mm x 175 mm (17.4 in. x
19.3 in. x 6.89 in. (4 U))
Weight (empty/fully loaded) 11 kg/32.6 kg (24.3 lb/71.9 lb)

Item Description
Reliability and availability l Mean time between failures (MTBF):

33.8 years
l Mean time to repair (MTTR): 64
minutes
l Availability: 0.9999964
NOTE
The preceding values are calculated based on the
typical configuration of the product. The actual
values will vary depending on the modules
installed on the product.
Environment specifications l Operating temperature and altitude:

-60 m to +1800 m (197 ft. to 5906 ft.):
0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)
1800 m to 4000 m (5906 ft. to 13123
ft.): Operating temperature decreases by
1°C (1.8°F) every time the altitude
increases 220 m (722 ft.).
4000 m (13123 ft.): 0°C to 35°C (32°F
to 95°F)
l Operating relative humidity: 5% RH to
95% RH (noncondensing)
l Storage temperature: -40°C to +70°C
(-40°F to +158°F)
l Storage altitude: < 5000 m (16404 ft.)
l Storage relative humidity: 5% RH to
Noise at normal temperature (acoustic ≤ 72 dB(A)

power)
Certification l EMC certification

l Safety certification
l Manufacturing certification
Part number l S9703 chassis: 02113547

l S9703 chassis, FCC certified: 02113611
4.2 S9706

Version Mapping
Chassis Version

NOTE
The S9706 chassis is 10 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm). When the chassis has no cable
management frame installed, the dimensions are 442 mm x 489 mm x 441.7 mm (W x D x
H). When the chassis has cable management frames installed, the dimensions are 442 mm x
585 mm x 441.7 mm (W x D x H). Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-11 show the S9706 chassis.
RUN/ALM
06
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
44 45
42 43
40 41 RUN/ALM
S9706
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
26 27
28 29
30 31 05
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
2
4 5 38 39
40 41 RUN/ALM
3 36 37
1
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 04
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 ETH 08
EH1D2
24 25 CON
SRUDC00
22 23 M
18 19 CLK1
16 17
14 15
12 13 RST
10 11
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6 7 SYNC
4 5
2 3
1
ETH 07
EH1D2
CON
SRUDC00
M
CLK2 ACT RUN/AL
CLK1
RST
EH1D2
SRUDC00
SYNC RUN/ALM
03
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
EH1D2
44 45
42 43
SRUDC00
40 41 RUN/ALM
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
24 25
26 27 02
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 40 41
2 3
5 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 01
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
EH1D2
8 4647
9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17 CMU
14 15
12 13
10 11 PWR4
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6 7
2 3
4 5 PWR3
1
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM
PWR1
ACT
ACT
MON
MON
≤45
kg（99
lb）
RS485
RS485
CMUA
CMUA
ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ALM 2
ON
RUN 1
ON ALM
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

fingers
keeping
moving parts,
Hazardous
away.
body parts
and other ਬ⡽έ
᧛䀜
᡽ᰁ䖢ᰬ
ћ⾷൞伄
Clean periodically
ᇐᵕ␻ᢡ
RUN/ALM
fingers
keeping
moving parts,
Hazardous
away.
body parts
and other ਬ⡽έ
᧛䀜
᡽ᰁ䖢ᰬ
ћ⾷൞伄
RUN/ALM
≤75
kg（16
5 lb）
NOTE


S9706
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH
EH1D2
08
EH1D2
SRUDC00
SRUDC00
SYNC
8
ACT RUN/ALM
2
RST
CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH

07
EH1D2
EH1D2
SRUDC00
SRUDC00
SYNC
ACT RUN/ALM
RST
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
3 3
ON ON ON ON
RUN RUN RUN RUN
ALM ALM ALM ALM
FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT

OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 5 6
1. Six of the following service cards can 2. Two MPUs 3. A pair of

be installed: mounting brackets
l Open Service Platform Unit The mounting

brackets are used to
l 100M Interface Card secure the chassis in
l 1000M Interface Card the cabinet.

NOTE
The cards supported by a switch depend on
the software version. For details, see
Hardware Query Tool.
4. Four power modules 5. Two 7.6 6. Reserved slot

EH1D200CMU00- NOTE
Centralized Monitoring Install a filler panel
Unit in the reserved slot.

7. Front ESD jack 8. Cable management -

frames
NOTE NOTE
The ground terminal of an ESD wrist strap Cable management frames
can be inserted into this jack. The ESD wrist are used to route cables.
strap can provide ESD protection when the
chassis is reliably grounded.

5
FAN1
FAN2
ћ⾷൞伄᡽ᰁ䖢ᰬ᧛䀜ਬ⡽έ
RUN/ALM
4
1
RUN/ALM
1. Two 6 Fan Module 2. Rear ESD jack 3. JG ground

terminal
NOTE
The ground terminal of an ESD wrist strap can be NOTE
inserted into this jack. The ESD wrist strap can The JG ground
provide ESD protection when the chassis is terminal is used to
reliably grounded. ground the chassis.
4. Air filter -
5. A pair of removable handles
NOTE NOTE
The air filter prevents
You can install these handles on two sides of the
dust from entering the
chassis to lift the chassis.
chassis.
Related Content


The S9706 chassis provides 6 LPU slots, 2 SRU slots, 2 CMU slots, and 4 power supply slots.
Figure 4-14 shows the slot layout at the front of the S9706 chassis, and Figure 4-15 shows
the slot layout at the rear of the S9706.
SLOT06-LPU
SLOT05-LPU
SLOT04-LPU
SLOT08-SRU
SLOT07-SRU
SLOT03-LPU
SLOT02-LPU
SLOT01-LPU
PWR1
PWR2
PWR3
PWR4
CMU1
CMU2
FAN1
FAN2


Supported
MPU slot SLOT07 and MPUs The SRUs work in

mode.

by a switch depend
see 2 Version
Card Components.
l 1000M Interface
Card
l GE/10GE
Interface Card
l 10GE Interface
Card
l 40GE Interface
Card
l 40GE/100GE
Interface Card
l 100GE Interface
Card
Power slot PWR1 to PWR4 power modules -
CMU slot CMU1 and CMU2 EH1D200CMU00 The CMUs work in

active/standby
mode.
Fan module slot FAN1, FAN2 6 Fan Module -

NOTE
power modules.
The S9706 provides slots PWR1 to PWR4 for DC or AC power modules, as shown in Slot
The S9706 series switches support three redundancy modes of power modules: N+N, N+1,
and N+0. The value of N depends on the maximum power actually required by the system.
Ensure that the total maximum output power of N power modules (N x maximum output
power of each power module) is larger than the maximum power actually required by the

system. For example, the maximum power required by the system is 4000 W. If two 2200 W
power modules are installed in the chassis, they work in 2+0 mode. If three 2200 W power
modules are installed, they work in 2+1 redundancy mode. If four 2200 W power modules are
installed, they work in 2+2 redundancy mode. The system can identify the power redundancy
mode, and you do not need to manually configure the power redundancy mode. Table 4-11
describes the three power redundancy modes and the specific redundancy modes supported by
the S9706 series switches.

Redu Description Scenario Product Support
ndanc
y
Mode
N+N l System power - 1+1, and 2+2 redundancy

supply is not
affected if no more
than N power
modules are
removed or fail.
l The maximum
output power of the
system is the total
maximum output
power of N power
modules.
l The first N
represents
mandatory power
modules, and the
second N represents
optional power
modules.
NOTE
The N+N redundancy
mode is often used when
two power supply
systems are available. In
this case, the first N
represents mandatory
power modules for the
first power supply
system, and the second N
second power supply
system. The use of
double power supply
systems provides
redundancy for both
power modules and
power supply systems.


ndanc
y
Mode
N+1 l System power The 800 W AC power 1+1, 2+1, and 3+1
supply is not module is configured redundancy
affected if one for 220 V AC input or
power module is 110 V dual-live-wire
removed or fails. AC input.
l The maximum l The 2200 W AC or 1+1, and 2+1 redundancy
output power of the 3000 W AC power
system is the total module is
maximum output configured for 220
power of N power V AC input or 110
modules. V dual-live-wire AC
l N power modules input.
are mandatory, and l The 2200 W DC
one power module power module is
is optional. configured for DC
input.
The 800 W AC, 2200 1+1, 2+1, and 3+1

W AC, or 3000 W AC redundancy
power module is
configured for 110 V
single-live-wire AC
input.
N+0 l System power The 800 W AC power 1+0, 2+0, 3+0, and 4+0
(no supply is affected module is configured
redund once any power for 220 V AC input or
ancy) module is removed 110 V dual-live-wire
or fails. AC input.
l The maximum l The 2200 W AC or 1+0, and 2+0
there are no optional power module is
power modules. configured for DC
input.


ndanc
y
Mode
The 800 W AC or 2200 1+0, 2+0, 3+0, and 4+0

W AC or 3000 W AC
power module is
single-live-wire AC
input.
NOTE
power supplies:
wire input).
DC power input

Mode

4400 W.
N+1 A maximum of 3 (2+1) 2200 W DC

4400 W.


Mode

4400 W.
NOTE

power input)
Mode

4400 W.
N+1 A maximum of 3 (2+1) 3000 W AC

4400 W.

4400 W.

4400 W.

4400 W.

4400 W.


Mode

1600 W.

2400 W.

3200 W.
NOTE
Mode

3000 W.

4400 W.

4400 W.

2200 W.


Mode

3300 W.

4400 W.

800 W.

1200 W.

1600 W.
Heat Dissipation
NOTE
l The S9706 has two fan modules respectively, located at the rear of the chassis. The fan
modules absorb cold air into the chassis to dissipate heat generated by working
components, ensuring that the chassis operates within a normal temperature range. For
details about the performance and attributes of a fan module, see 6 Fan Module.
The S9706 chassis are divided into multiple zones. If there are empty slots in a zone, the fans
corresponding to that zone operate at a low speed, which reduces power consumption and
noise.
As shown in Figure 4-16, two fan modules of the S9706 serve two zones, with four cards in
each zone.

Figure 4-16 S9706 fan zones
SLOT6-LPU
SLOT5-LPU
Zone 1
SLOT4-LPU
SLOT8-SRU
SLOT7-SRU
SLOT3-LPU
Zone 2
SLOT2-LPU
SLOT1-LPU
CMU1
CMU2
Airflow
RUN/ALM
06
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
44 45
42 43
40 41 RUN/ALM
S9706
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
28 29
30 31 05
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
2
4 5 38 39
40 41 RUN/ALM
3 36 37
1
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 04
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 ETH 08
EH1D2
24 25 CON
SRUDC00
22 23 M
18 19 CLK1
16 17
14 15
12 13 RST
10 11
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6 7 SYNC
4 5
2 3
1
ETH 07
EH1D2
CON
SRUDC00
M
CLK2 ACT RUN/AL
CLK1
RST
EH1D2
SRUDC00
SYNC RUN/ALM
03
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
EH1D2
44 45
42 43
SRUDC00
40 41 RUN/ALM
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
24 25
26 27 02
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 40 41
2 3
5 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 01
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
EH1D2
8 4647
9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17 CMU
14 15
12 13
10 11 PWR4
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6 7
2 3
4 5 PWR3
1
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM
PWR1
ACT
ACT
MON
MON
≤45
kg（99
lb）
RS485
RS485
CMUA
CMUA
ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ALM 2
ON
RUN 1
ON ALM
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

Air Filter
NOTE
(FCC) standards.
The S9706 uses sponge air filters or honeycomb air filters. An FCC-certified chassis must use
honeycomb air filters. Figure 4-18 shows a sponge air filter, and Figure 4-19 shows a



Specifications

Item Description
LPU slots 6
MCU slots 2
Fan slots 2
Power slots 4

240x10GE
l V200R002C00 and V200R003C00:
288xFE, 288xGE, 240x10GE, 48x40GE
l V200R005C00 to V200R007C10:
288xFE, 288xGE, 288x10GE, 48x40GE
l V200R008C00 to V200R009C00:
288xFE, 288xGE, 288x10GE, 48x40GE,
12x100GE
l V200R010C00 to V200R013C00:
288xFE, 288xGE, 288x10GE, 48x40GE,
24x100GE
Installation In an N66E or N68E cabinet, one or two

chassis in a cabinet
CSS Service port or CSS card clustering

loaded)
NOTE

Item Description

-72 V DC
l AC input voltage
50/60 Hz
290 V DC

mounting brackets) x 585 mm x 441.7 mm (17.4 in. x 23.0
in. x 17.39 in. (10 U))
mm x 489 mm x 441.7 mm (17.4 in. x
19.3 in. x 17.39 in. (10 U))
Weight (empty/fully loaded) 29 kg/75.8 kg (63.9 lb/167.1 lb)

24.2 years
minutes
NOTE

Item Description

-60 m to +1800 m (197 ft. to 5906 ft.):
0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)
1800 m to 4000 m (5906 ft. to 13123
4000 m (13123 ft.): 0°C to 35°C (32°F
to 95°F)
(-40°F to +158°F)

power)


4.3 S9712
Version Mapping
Chassis Version

NOTE
The S9712 chassis is 15 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm). When the chassis has no cable
management frame installed, the dimensions are 442 mm x 489 mm x 663.95 mm (W x D x

H). When the chassis has cable management frames installed, the dimensions are 442 mm x
585 mm x 663.95 mm (W x D x H). Figure 4-20 and Figure 4-21 show the S9712 chassis.
RUN/ALM
12
EH1D2
G48TEA0
S9712
4647
44 45
42 43
38 39
40 41 RUN/ALM
36 37
34 35
30 31
32 33 11
28 29
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 RUN/ALM
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
28 29
30 31 10
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 RUN/ALM
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
28 29
30 31 09
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 RUN/ALM
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
30 31
32 33 08
28 29
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 RUN/ALM
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
28 29
30 31
32 33
07
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
32 33
34 35 14
30 31
28 29 ETH
26 27
EH1D2
24 25 CON
SRUDC00
22 23 M
18 19 CLK1
16 17
14 15
12 13 RST
10 11
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6 7 SYNC
4 5
2 3
1
13
ETH
EH1D2
CON
SRUDC00
M
CLK2 ACT RUN/AL
CLK1
RST
EH1D2
SRUDC00
SYNC RUN/ALM
06
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
EH1D2
44 45
SRUDC00
42 43
38 39
40 41 RUN/ALM
36 37
34 35
32 33
28 29
30 31 05
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 RUN/ALM
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
28 29
30 31 04
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 RUN/ALM
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
28 29
30 31 03
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 RUN/ALM
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 02
24 25
22 23 EH1D2
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41 RUN/ALM
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
28 29
30 31 01
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29 PWR6
26 27
24 25
22 23 PWR5
20 21
18 19
16 17 CMU
14 15
12 13
10 11 PWR4
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6
2
4 5
7 PWR3
3
1
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM
PWR1
ACT
ACT
MON
MON
≤75
kg（16
5 lb）
RS485
RS485
ON
CMUA RUN
CMUA ON
RUN
ALM
ALM
ON FAULT
RUN
ON FAULT OFF
RUN
2
ON
RUN
ALM
1 OFF
ALM
ON FAULT
RUN
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF

fingers
keeping
moving parts,
Hazardous
away.
body parts
and other ਬ⡽έ
᧛䀜
᡽ᰁ䖢ᰬ
ћ⾷൞伄
Clean periodically
ᇐᵕ␻ᢡ
RUN/ALM
fingers
keeping
moving parts,
Hazardous
away.
body parts
and other ਬ⡽έ
᧛䀜
᡽ᰁ䖢ᰬ
ћ⾷൞伄
RUN/ALM
fingers
keeping
moving parts,
Hazardous
away.
body parts
and other ਬ⡽έ
᧛䀜
᡽ᰁ䖢ᰬ
ћ⾷൞伄
RUN/ALM
fingers
keeping
moving parts,
Hazardous
away.
body parts
and other ਬ⡽έ
᧛䀜
᡽ᰁ䖢ᰬ
ћ⾷൞伄
RUN/ALM
≤75
kg（16
5 lb）
NOTE

RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0 RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH

EH1D2
EH1D2
SRUDC00
SRUDC00
SYNC
ACT RUN/ALM
2
RST
CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH 8

EH1D2
EH1D2
SRUDC00
SRUDC00
SYNC
ACT RUN/ALM
RST
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
EH1D2
G48TEA0
G48TEA0
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
3 3
ON ON ON ON ON ON
RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 5 4 6

1. Twelve of the following service cards 2. Two MPUs 3. A pair of

can be installed: mounting brackets
l Open Service Platform Unit The mounting

brackets are used to
l 100M Interface Card secure the chassis in
l 1000M Interface Card the cabinet.

NOTE
The cards supported by a switch depend on
the software version. For details, see
Hardware Query Tool.
4. Six power modules 5. Two 7.6 6. Reserved slot

EH1D200CMU00- NOTE
Centralized Monitoring Install a filler panel
Unit in the reserved slot.
7. Front ESD jack 8. Cable management -

frames
NOTE NOTE
The ground terminal of an ESD wrist strap Cable management frames
can be inserted into this jack. The ESD wrist are used to route cables.
strap can provide ESD protection when the
chassis is reliably grounded.


5
FAN1
FAN2
and other body parts away. FAN3
FAN4
RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM
1
4
RUN/ALM

RUN/ALM
1. Four 6 Fan Module 2. Rear ESD jack 3. JG ground

terminal
NOTE
The ground terminal of an ESD wrist strap can be NOTE
inserted into this jack. The ESD wrist strap can The JG ground
provide ESD protection when the chassis is terminal is used to
reliably grounded. ground the chassis.
4. Air filter -
5. A pair of removable handles
NOTE NOTE
The air filter prevents
You can install these handles on two sides of the
dust from entering the
chassis to lift the chassis.
chassis.
Related Content


The S9712 chassis provides 12 LPU slots, 2 SRU slots, 2 CMU slots, and 6 power supply
slots.
Figure 4-24 shows the slot layout at the front of the S9712 chassis, and Figure 4-25 shows
the slot layout at the rear of the S9712 chassis.
SLOT12-LPU
SLOT11-LPU
SLOT10-LPU
SLOT09-LPU
SLOT08-LPU
SLOT07-LPU
SLOT14-SRU
SLOT13-SRU
SLOT06-LPU
SLOT05-LPU
SLOT04-LPU
SLOT03-LPU
SLOT02-LPU
SLOT01-LPU
PWR1
PWR2
PWR3
PWR4
PWR5
PWR6
CMU1
CMU2

FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FAN4

Supported
MPU slot SLOT13 and MPUs The SRUs work in

mode.


Supported

by a switch depend
see 2 Version
Card Components.
l 1000M Interface
Card
l GE/10GE
Interface Card
l 10GE Interface
Card
l 40GE Interface
Card
l 40GE/100GE
Interface Card
l 100GE Interface
Card
Power slot PWR1 to PWR6 power modules -
CMU slot CMU1 and CMU2 EH1D200CMU00 The CMUs work in

active/standby
mode.
Fan module slot FAN1 to FAN4 6 Fan Module -

NOTE
power modules.
The S9712 provides slots PWR1 to PWR6 for DC or AC power modules, as shown in Slot
The S9712 series switches support three redundancy modes of power modules: N+N, N+1,
and N+0. The value of N depends on the maximum power actually required by the system.
Ensure that the total maximum output power of N power modules (N x maximum output
power of each power module) is larger than the maximum power actually required by the
system. For example, the maximum power required by the system is 4000 W. If two 2200 W
power modules are installed in the chassis, they work in 2+0 mode. If three 2200 W power
modules are installed, they work in 2+1 redundancy mode. If four 2200 W power modules are
installed, they work in 2+2 redundancy mode. The system can identify the power redundancy
mode, and you do not need to manually configure the power redundancy mode. Table 4-18

describes the three power redundancy modes and the specific redundancy modes supported by
the S9712 series switches.

ndanc
y
Mode
N+N l System power - 1+1, 2+2, and 3+3

supply is not redundancy
affected if no more
than N power
modules are
removed or fail.
l The maximum
output power of the
system is the total
maximum output
power of N power
modules.
l The first N
represents
mandatory power
modules, and the
second N represents
optional power
modules.
NOTE
The N+N redundancy
mode is often used when
two power supply
systems are available. In
this case, the first N
first power supply
system, and the second N
second power supply
system. The use of
double power supply
systems provides
redundancy for both
power modules and
power supply systems.
N+1 l System power The 800 W AC power 1+1, 2+1, 3+1, 4+1, and
supply is not module is configured 5+1 redundancy
affected if one for 220 V AC input or
power module is 110 V dual-live-wire
removed or fails. AC input.


ndanc
y
Mode
l The maximum l The 3000 W AC or 1+1, 2+1, and 3+1
output power of the 2200 W AC power redundancy
one power module power module is
is optional. configured for DC
input.
The 800 W AC, 2200 1+1, 2+1, 3+1, 4+1, and

W AC, or 3000 W AC 5+1 redundancy
power module is
single-live-wire AC
input.
N+0 l System power The 800 W AC power 1+0, 2+0, 3+0, 4+0, 5+0,
(no supply is affected module is configured and 6+0
redund once any power for 220 V AC input or
ancy) module is removed 110 V dual-live-wire
or fails. AC input.
l The maximum l The 2200 W AC or 1+0, 2+0, and 3+0
there are no optional power module is
power modules. configured for DC
input.
The 800 W AC, 2200 1+0, 2+0, 3+0, 4+0, 5+0,

W AC, or 3000 W AC and 6+0
power module is
single-live-wire AC
input.

NOTE
To support power supply for S9712, the 800 W AC power modules must meet the following
requirements:
l 220 V: At least two active 800 W AC power modules
l 110 V: At least three active 800 W AC power modules
power supplies:

wire input).
DC power input

Mode

6600 W.
N+1 A maximum of 4 (3+1) 2200 W DC

6600 W.

6600 W.

NOTE

power input)
Mode

6600 W.

6600 W.

6600 W.

6600 W.

6600 W.

6600 W.

2400 W.

4000 W.


Mode

4800 W.
NOTE
Mode

4500 W.

6600 W.

6600 W.

3300 W.

5500 W.

6600 W.


Mode

1200 W.

2000 W.

2400 W.
Heat Dissipation
NOTE
l The S9712 has four fan modules respectively, located at the rear of the chassis. The fan
modules absorb cold air into the chassis to dissipate heat generated by working
components, ensuring that the chassis operates within a normal temperature range. For
details about the performance and attributes of a fan module, see 6 Fan Module.
The S9712 chassis are divided into multiple zones. If there are empty slots in a zone, the fans
corresponding to that zone operate at a low speed, which reduces power consumption and
noise.
As shown in Figure 4-26, four fan modules of the S9712 serve four zones, with four cards in
each zone. The cards in slots 4 and 9 each belong to two zones and are cooled by two fan
modules.

Figure 4-26 S9712 fan zones
SLOT12-LPU
SLOT11-LPU
Zone 1
SLOT10-LPU
SLOT9-LPU
SLOT8-LPU
Zone 2
SLOT7-LPU
SLOT14-SRU
SLOT13-SRU
SLOT6-LPU
Zone 3
SLOT5-LPU
SLOT4-LPU
SLOT3-LPU
Zone 4
SLOT2-LPU
SLOT1-LPU
CMU1
CMU2
Airflow
NOTE
The S9703, S9706, and S9712 use the same airflow design.

RUN/ALM
06
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
44 45
42 43
40 41 RUN/ALM
S9706
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
28 29
30 31 05
26 27
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
2
4 5 38 39
40 41 RUN/ALM
3 36 37
1
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 04
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 ETH 08
EH1D2
24 25 CON
SRUDC00
22 23 M
18 19 CLK1
16 17
14 15
12 13 RST
10 11
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6 7 SYNC
4 5
2 3
1
ETH 07
EH1D2
CON
SRUDC00
M
CLK2 ACT RUN/AL
CLK1
RST
EH1D2
SRUDC00
SYNC RUN/ALM
03
EH1D2
G48TEA0
4647
EH1D2
44 45
42 43
SRUDC00
40 41 RUN/ALM
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
24 25
26 27 02
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11 4647
EH1D2
8 9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 40 41
2 3
5 38 39 RUN/ALM
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
26 27
28 29 01
24 25
EH1D2
22 23
20 21
G48TEA0
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
10 11
EH1D2
8 4647
9 44 45
G48TEA0
6 7 42 43
4 5 40 41
2 3 38 39
1 36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17 CMU
14 15
12 13
10 11 PWR4
EH1D2
8 9
G48TEA0
6 7
2 3
4 5 PWR3
1
PWR2
RUN/ALM
RUN/ALM
PWR1
ACT
ACT
MON
MON
≤45
kg（99
lb）
RS485
RS485
CMUA
CMUA
ON
RUN
ON
RUN
ALM 2
ON
RUN 1
ON ALM
RUN FAULT
ALM
FAULT OFF
ALM
FAULT OFF
FAULT OFF
OFF
Air Filter
NOTE
(FCC) standards.
The S9712 uses sponge air filters or honeycomb air filters. An FCC-certified chassis must use
honeycomb air filters. Figure 4-28 shows a sponge air filter, and Figure 4-29 shows a



Specifications

Item Description
LPU slots 12
MCU slots 2
Fan slots 4
Power slots 6

480x10GE
l V200R002C00 and V200R003C00:
576xFE, 576xGE, 480x10GE, 96x40GE
l V200R005C00 to V200R007C10:
576xFE, 576xGE, 576x10GE, 96x40GE
l V200R008C00 to V200R009C00:
576xFE, 576xGE, 576x10GE, 96x40GE,
24x100GE
l V200R010C00 to V200R013C00:
576xFE, 576xGE, 576x10GE, 96x40GE,
48x100GE
Installation In an N66E or N68E cabinet, one cabinet

for one chassis
CSS Service port or CSS card clustering

loaded)
NOTE

Item Description

-72 V DC
l AC input voltage
50/60 Hz
290 V DC

mounting brackets) x 585 mm x 663.95 mm (17.4 in. x 23.0
in. x 26.1 in. (15 U))
mm x 489 mm x 663.95 mm (17.4 in. x
19.3 in. x 26.1 in. (15 U))
Weight (empty/fully loaded) 37 kg/116 kg (81.6 lb/255.7 lb)

24.1 years
minutes
NOTE

Item Description

-60 m to +1800 m (197 ft. to 5906 ft.):
0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)
1800 m to 4000 m (5906 ft. to 13123
4000 m (13123 ft.): 0°C to 35°C (32°F
to 95°F)
(-40°F to +158°F)

power)



Hardware Description 5 Power Supply Facilities
5 Power Supply Facilities
About This Chapter
5.1 Power Module

5.2 Power Distribution Box
5.1 Power Module
5.1.1 2200 W DC Power Module
Version Mapping
Table 5-1 Switch chassis and software versions matching a 2200 W DC power module
Model Power Module Name S9700 Chassis
W2PSD2200 2200 W DC power module Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Appearance
A 2200 W DC power module is 3 U in height.

Figure 5-1 2200 W DC power module
RTN(+)
NEG(-)
RUN
ON ALM
OFF FAULT
V; 60A
-48 -60
Functions
A 2200 W DC power module provides a maximum power of 2200 W for the chassis. Table
5-2 describes the functions of a 2200 W DC power module.
Table 5-2 Functions of a 2200 W DC power module

Function Description
Input protection Input undervoltage In this protection state, the power

protection module is turned off and stops
supplying power. When the system
recovers from input undervoltage,
the power module can automatically
start supplying power again.
Input overcurrent protection In this protection state, the power

module is turned off and stops
supplying power. The power
module cannot automatically start
supplying power again and needs to
be replaced.

Output protection Output overvoltage In this protection state:

protection l If output overvoltage is caused
by the power module itself, the
power module stops supplying
power. When the system
recovers from output
overvoltage, the power module
cannot automatically start
supplying power again.
l If output overvoltage is caused
by increase of the input voltage
received from the external power
source, the power module stops
supplying power. When the
system recovers from output
can automatically start supplying
power again.
Output overcurrent In this protection state, the output

protection current is limited to a certain value.
When the system recovers from
output overcurrent, the power
module can automatically start
Output short-circuit In this protection state, the power

protection module supplies power
intermittently, and the output
current is limited to within a range.
output short-circuit, the power
Overtemperature protection When the temperature of the power

module exceeds a specified
threshold, the power module stops
temperature falls into the normal
range, the power module
automatically resumes power
supply.
Hot swapping The power module is hot

swappable.

Panel Description
Figure 5-2 Panel of a 2200 W DC power module
1 7
-48 -60V; 60A MAX
RUN 5
2 ALM 4
-48
FAULT
-60V; 60A MAX
3
1. NEG terminal 2. Power switch 3. FAULT indicator

NOTE
l ON: The power module is
supplying power.
l OFF: The power module is not
supplying power.
4. ALM indicator 5. RUN indicator 6. Ejector lever

NOTE
Raise the ejector lever to release the
power module from the slot, and lower
the ejector lever to lock the power
module in the slot.
7. RTN terminal - -
Table 5-3 Indicators on a power module panel

Indicator Color Description
FAULT Red Steady on: The power

module has a fault that
cannot be rectified.

ALM Yellow Steady on: A power output

shutdown alarm,
overtemperature alarm,
output overcurrent alarm,
input overvoltage alarm, or
input undervoltage alarm
has been generated.
Blinking: Communication
with the monitoring device
(MCU or CMU) has been
interrupted.
RUN Green Steady on: The power input

is normal.
Table 5-4 describes the relationship between cables and the terminals on a 2200 W DC power
module.
Table 5-4 Relationship between cables and the terminals on a 2200 W DC power module
Input Terminal Cable Type Cable Color Connected Terminal

Identifier
RTN Power ground Black OT bare crimp terminal

NOTE cable
RTN indicates
return.
NEG Power cable Blue
Specifications
Table 5-5 Technical specifications of a 2200 W DC power module
Item Value
Dimensions (W x D x H) 41 mm x 393 mm x 130 mm (1.6 in.

x 15.5 in. x 5.1 in.)
Weight < 2.5 kg
Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC/-60 V DC
Input voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC
Maximum input current 60 A
Output Rated output voltage -53.5 V DC

Item Value
Output voltage range -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Maximum output current 42 A
Maximum output power 2200 W
Hot swapping Supported
Environment specifications l Operating temperature: 0°C to

45°C (32°F to 113°F)
l Operating relative humidity: 5%
RH to 95% RH (noncondensing)
l Storage temperature: -40°C to
+70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
l Storage relative humidity: 5% RH
to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Part number 02270117
5.1.2 800 W AC Power Module
Version Mapping
Table 5-6 Switch chassis and software versions matching an 800 W AC power module
W2PSA0800 800 W AC power module Supported in V200R002C00 to

V200R013C00
Appearance
An 800 W AC power module is 3 U in height.

Figure 5-3 800 W AC power module
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；5A
ON
RUN
ALM
FAULT
OFF
Functions
An 800 W AC power module provides a maximum power of 800 W for the chassis. Table 5-7
describes the functions of an 800 W AC power module.
Table 5-7 Functions of an 800 W AC power module



be replaced.


power again.



supply.

swappable.

Panel Description
Figure 5-4 Panel of an 800 W AC power module
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；5A
1 7
ON
RUN 5
2 ALM 4
OFF
FAULT 3
1. AC power 2. Power switch 3. FAULT indicator

socket NOTE
supplying power.
supplying power.
4. ALM indicator 5. RUN indicator 6. Ejector lever

NOTE
the ejector lever to lock the power
module in the slot.
7. Loose-proof - -
pinch




shutdown alarm,
has been generated.
interrupted.

is normal.
Specifications
Table 5-9 Technical specifications of an 800 W AC power module

Item Value
Dimensions (W x D x H) 41 mm x 393 mm x 130 mm (1.6 in. x

15.5 in. x 5.1 in.)
Weight < 2.5 kg
Input Rated input voltage 220 V AC/110 V AC; 50/60 Hz
Rated input voltage range 200 V AC to 240 V AC (220 V AC

input)/100 V AC to 120 V AC (110 V
AC input); 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Maximum input voltage range 90 V AC to 290 V AC; 47 Hz to 63

Hz (When the input voltage is in the
range of 90 V AC to 175 V AC, the
power module provides up to half of
the maximum output power.)
Maximum input current 5A
Output Maximum output current 15 A (220 V AC input)/7.5 A (110 V

AC input)
Maximum output power 800 W (220 V AC input)/400 W (110

V AC input)

Item Value

45°C (32°F to 113°F)
+70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
Version Mapping
Table 5-10 Switch chassis and software versions matching a 2200 W AC power module
W2PSA2230 2200 W AC power module Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
PAC-2200W 2200 W AC power module Supported in V200R001C00 to

F V200R013C00
NOTE
PAC-2200W
F has
replaced
W2PSA2230
since Feb,
2015.
Appearance
A 2200 W AC power module is 3 U in height.

Figure 5-5 2200 W AC power module (W2PSA2230)
100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
ON
RUN
ALM
FAULT
OFF
Figure 5-6 2200 W AC power module (PAC-2200WF)
00WF
PAC-22
INPUT
OUTPUT
ALARM

NOTE
Do not insert the power cable locking strap into an air vent on the power module panel, as this will affect
operations of the power module.
Functions
A 2200 W AC power module provides a maximum power of 2200 W for the chassis. Table
5-11 describes the functions of a 2200 W AC power module.
Table 5-11 Functions of a 2200 W AC power module


be replaced.

power again.




supply.

swappable.
Panel Description
Figure 5-7 Panel of a 2200 W AC power module (W2PSA2230)

100-120V-;200-240V-;50/60Hz；15.5A
ON
RUN 5
2 ALM 4
OFF
FAULT 3
1. Power 2. Power switch 3. FAULT indicator

socket NOTE
supplying power.
supplying power.

4. ALM 5. RUN indicator 6. Ejector lever

indicator NOTE
the ejector lever to lock the power module
in the slot.
Figure 5-8 Panel of a 2200 W AC power module (PAC-2200WF)
ON INPUT
6
1 OUTPUT
5
4
OFF ALARM
3
100-120/200-240V;50/60Hz;15.5A
1. Power switch 2. Ejector lever 3. Power

NOTE NOTE socket
l When the power switch is turned ON, the Raise the ejector lever to release the
power module supplies power to the power module from the slot, and
chassis. lower the ejector lever to lock the
l When the power switch is turned OFF, power module in the slot.
the power module does not supply power
to the chassis.
4. ALARM indicator 5. OUTPUT indicator 6. INPUT

indicator
Table 5-12 Indicators on a power module panel (W2PSA2230)




shutdown alarm,
has been generated.
interrupted.

is normal.
Table 5-13 Indicators on a power module panel (PAC-2200WF)

INPUT Green Steady on: The input power

of the power module is in
the normal range.
Blinking: The power
module is in an input
undervoltage or input
overvoltage condition.
Off: The power module
receives no input power.
OUTPUT Green Steady on: The output

power of the power module
is in the normal range.
provides no output power.
ALARM Red Steady on: The power

voltage is experiencing
overheating, external short
circuit, output overvoltage,
output overcurrent, or a fan
failure.
between the power module
and CMU has been
interrupted.
Off: The power module is
working normally.

Specifications
Table 5-14 Technical specifications of a 2200 W AC power module

Item Value
Dimensions (W x D x H) 41 mm x 393 mm x 130 mm (1.6 in.

x 15.5 in. x 5.1 in.)
Weight < 2.5 kg
Input Rated input voltage 220 V AC/110 V AC; 50/60 Hz

input)/100 V AC to 120 V AC (110
V AC input); 47 Hz to 63 Hz

Hz (The maximum output power
reduces by a half when the input
voltage is in the range of 90 V AC to
175 V AC.)
Maximum input current 15.5 A
Output Maximum output current 42 A (220 V AC input)/21 A (110 V

AC Input)
Maximum output power 2200 W (220 V AC input)/1100 W

(110 V AC input)

45°C (32°F to 113°F)
+70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
Part number W2PSA2230: 02130977

PAC-2200WF: 02131120

Version Mapping
Table 5-15 Switch chassis and software versions matching a 3000 W AC power module
PAC3KS54- 3000 W AC power module (Black) Supported only in V200R012C00

CB and V200R013C00
Appearance
A 3000 W AC power module is 3 U in height.
Figure 5-9 3000 W AC power module
54-CB
PAC3KS
INPUT
OUTPUT
ALARM
240V; 14A
16A or
V; 50/60Hz;
/200-240
-100-130
NOTE
Do not insert the power cable locking strap into an air vent on the power module panel, as this will affect
operations of the power module.
Functions
A 3000 W AC power module provides a maximum power of 3000 W for the chassis. Table
5-16 describes the functions of a 3000 W AC power module.

Table 5-16 Functions of a 3000 W AC power module

Input Input overvoltage In this protection state, the power module is turned
protection protection off and stops supplying power. When the system
recovers from input overvoltage, the power module
can automatically start supplying power again.
Input undervoltage In this protection state, the power module is turned

protection off and stops supplying power. When the system
recovers from input undervoltage, the power
module can automatically start supplying power
again.
Input overcurrent In this protection state, the power module is turned

protection off and stops supplying power. The power module
cannot automatically start supplying power again
and needs to be replaced.
Output Output In this protection state:

protection overvoltage l If output overvoltage is caused by the power
protection module itself, the power module stops supplying
power. When the system recovers from output
overvoltage, the power module cannot
automatically start supplying power again.
l If output overvoltage is caused by increase of
the input voltage received from the external
power source, the power module stops
supplying power. When the system recovers
from output overvoltage, the power module can
Output overcurrent In this protection state, the output current is limited

protection to a certain value. When the system recovers from
output overcurrent, the power module can
Output short- In this protection state, the power module supplies

circuit protection power intermittently, and the output current is
limited to within a range. When the system
recovers from output short-circuit, the power
module can automatically start supplying power
again.
Overtemperature protection When the temperature of the power module

exceeds a specified threshold, the power module
stops supplying power. When the temperature falls
into the normal range, the power module
automatically resumes power supply.
Hot swapping The power module is hot swappable.

Panel Description
Figure 5-10 Panel of a 3000 W AC power module
ON INPUT
6
1 OUTPUT
5
4
OFF ALARM
3
-100-130/200-240V;50/60Hz;16A or 240V; 14A
1. Power switch 2. Ejector lever 3. Power

NOTE NOTE socket
l When the power switch is turned ON, the Raise the ejector lever to release the
power module supplies power to the power module from the slot, and
chassis. lower the ejector lever to lock the
l When the power switch is turned OFF, power module in the slot.
the power module does not supply power
to the chassis.
4. ALARM indicator 5. OUTPUT indicator 6. INPUT

indicator

INPUT Green Steady on: The input power

of the power module is in
the normal range.
Blinking: The power
module is in an input
undervoltage or input
overvoltage condition.
receives no input power.
OUTPUT Green Steady on: The output

power of the power module
is in the normal range.
provides no output power.

ALARM Red Steady on: The power

voltage is experiencing
overtemperature, external
short circuit, output
overvoltage, output
overcurrent, or a fan failure.
between the power module
and CMU has been
interrupted.
Off: The power module is
working normally.
Specifications
Table 5-18 Technical specifications of a 3000 W AC power module
Item Value
Dimensions (W x D x H) 41 mm x 417.4 mm x 130 mm (0.2

in. x 16.4 in. x 5.1 in.)
Weight < 3.0 kg
AC input Rated input voltage 220 V AC/110 V AC; 50/60 Hz

input)/100 V AC to 130 V AC (110
V AC input); 47 Hz to 63 Hz

Hz (The maximum output power
reduces by a half when the input
voltage is in the range of 90 V AC to
175 V AC.)
The maximum current of the power
cable used by the 3000 W AC power
module is 16 A. When the 220 V
input is used, the minimum voltage
cannot be lower than 200 V. When
the 110 V input is used, the minimum
voltage cannot be lower than 100 V.
Maximum input current 16 A
High- Rated input voltage 240 V DC

voltage
DC input Rated input voltage range 190 V DC to 290 V DC
Maximum input voltage range 14 A

Item Value
Output Maximum output current 56.1 A (220 V AC input)/28.1 A (110

V AC Input)
Maximum output power 3000 W (220 V AC input or 240 V

DC)/1500 W (110 V AC input)

45°C
+70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
Part number PAC3KS54-CB: 02311XYE

PAC3KS54-CE: 02312FFP
NOTE
When a PAC3KS54-CB power module is used in the following chassis, its maximum output power is
2200 W:
l S9703 chassis running a version between V200R001C00 and V200R011C10
5.2 Power Distribution Box

5.2.1 2200 W DC Power Distribution Box
Figure 5-11 shows a 2200 W DC power distribution box.
Figure 5-11 2200 W DC power distribution box

A 2200 W DC power distribution box can use -48 V two-way short-circuiting bars, each of
which provides JG input terminals. A -48 V two-way short-circuiting bar allows a maximum
of 120 A input current and converts one input into two outputs to circuit breakers. Figure
5-12 shows a -48 V two-way short-circuiting bar.
Figure 5-12 -48 V two-way short-circuiting bar
A 2200 W DC power distribution box provides short-circuit protection and overload

protection.
Table 5-19 lists specifications of a 2200 W DC power distribution box.
Table 5-19 Specifications of a 2200 W DC power distribution box
Item Description
Inpu Rated input -48 V DC/-60 V DC

t voltage
Input voltage -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC
Input mode Eight DC inputs by default (Short-circuiting bars can convert the
eight inputs into four.)
Maximum 60 A per input (120 A per input when short-circuiting bars are
input current used)
Input terminal Cord end terminal, allowing power cables with a maximum of 35
mm2 diameter (When short-circuiting bars are used, M6 OT
terminals are used for -48 V input and cord end terminals are used
for RTN input.)
Outp Rated output -48 V DC to -60 V DC

ut voltage
Output voltage -38.4 V DC to -72 V DC

Item Description
Number of Eight
outputs
Current of 63 A
each circuit
breaker
Output Overcurrent protection (Power supply needs to be restored

protection manually once the power distribution box enters the overcurrent
protection state.)
Output Cord end terminal, allowing power cables with a maximum of 35

terminal mm2 diameter
Envi Operating -25°C to +55°C (-13°F to +131°F)

ron temperature
ment
speci Storage -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
ficati temperature
ons Relative ≤ 95%
humidity
Standard 70 kPa to 106 kPa

atmospheric
pressure
Dimensions (W x D x 442 mm x 89.2 mm x 110 mm (17.4 in. x 3.5 in. x 4.4 in.)
H)
Model EH1M00PDBS01
Figure 5-13 and Figure 5-14 show power distribution in a 2200 W DC power distribution
box.
Figure 5-13 Power distribution in a 2200 W DC power distribution box (eight inputs and
eight outputs)
A1- A2- A3- A4- A1+A2+A3+A4+ B1+B2+B3+B4+ B1- B2- B3- B4-
Input
Output
A1- A2- A3- A4- A1+A2+A3+A4+ B1+B2+B3+B4+ B1- B2- B3- B4-
Area A Area B

Figure 5-14 Power distribution in a 2200 W DC power distribution box (four inputs and eight
outputs)
5.2.2 800 W AC Power Distribution Box
Figure 5-15 shows an 800 W AC power distribution box.
Figure 5-15 800 W AC power distribution box
An 800 W AC power distribution box can convert one power input into eight power outputs,
and it provides short-circuit protection and overload protection.
Table 5-20 lists specifications of an 800 W AC power distribution box.

Table 5-20 Specifications of an 800 W AC power distribution box

Item Description
Inpu Input voltage Rated voltage: 100 V AC to 240 V AC

t Operating voltage: 90 V AC to 276 V AC
Input terminal Cord end terminal (applicable to 0.75-25 mm2 power cables)
Outp Output Rated voltage: 100 V AC to 240 V AC

ut voltage Operating voltage: 90 V AC to 276 V AC
Number of Eight outputs controlled by eight circuit breakers

outputs
Current of 10 A
each circuit
breaker
Output Overcurrent protection (Power supply needs to be restored

protection manually once the power distribution box enters the overcurrent
protection state.)
Output Cord end terminal (applicable to 1.0 mm2 cables)

terminal
Envi Operating -25°C to +55°C (-13°F to +131°F)

ron temperature
ment
ficati temperature
ons Relative ≤ 95%
humidity
Standard 70 kPa to 106 kPa

atmospheric
pressure
H)
Model IN6W18L10A
Figure 5-16 shows power distribution in an 800 W AC power distribution box.

Figure 5-16 Power distribution in an 800 W AC power distribution box
5.2.3 2200 W AC Power Distribution Box
Figure 5-17 shows a 2200 W AC power distribution box.
Figure 5-17 2200 W AC power distribution box
A 2200 W AC power distribution box provides short-circuit protection and overload

protection.
Table 5-21 lists specifications of a 2200 W AC power distribution box.
Table 5-21 Specifications of a 2200 W AC power distribution box

Item Description
Inpu Input voltage Rated voltage: 100 V AC to 240 V AC

t Operating voltage: 90 V AC to 276 V AC

Item Description
Input mode Typical application: two AC inputs (1+1). The delivered terminal
block has two AC input terminals (1+1) by default.
Three AC inputs (2+1)
Four AC inputs (2+2)
Maximum Two AC inputs (1+1): 32 A + 32 A (maximum)

input current
Three AC inputs (2+1): 16 A x 2 + 32 A (maximum)
Four AC inputs (2+2): 16 A x 4 (maximum)
Frequency 50/60±3 Hz
Outp Output Rated voltage: 100 V AC to 240 V AC

ut voltage Operating voltage: 90 V AC to 276 V AC
Number of Four outputs, with short-circuit protection function

outputs
Current of 16 A (maximum)
each output
Output Overcurrent protection and short-circuit protection (Power supply

protection needs to be restored manually once the power distribution box
enters a protection state.)
Envi Operating 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)

ron temperature
ment
ficati temperature
ons Relative 5% to 95%
humidity
Altitude -60 m to +3000 m (-197 ft. to +9483 ft.)
Safety standards EN60950-1, IEC60950-1

compliance
Environmental RoHS, WEEE, Huawei regulation on the 13 hazardous substances

standards compliance
H)
Color NC purple grey
Model IM1W24APD

Figure 5-18, Figure 5-19, and Figure 5-20 show power distribution in a 2200 W AC power
distribution box.
NOTE
If a 2200 W AC power distribution box is connected to one or two 2200 W AC power modules, only
OUTPUT A and OUTPUT B are used. In this case, only one input is required.
Figure 5-18 Power distribution in a 2200 W AC power distribution box (two inputs)

Figure 5-19 Power distribution in a 2200 W AC power distribution box (three inputs)

Figure 5-20 Power distribution in a 2200 W AC power distribution box (four inputs)

Hardware Description 6 Fan Module
6 Fan Module
About This Chapter
6.1 EH1M00FBX000 Fan Module
6.1 EH1M00FBX000 Fan Module
A fan module reports an alarm when a fan in it fails. When receiving such an alarm, fix the
fault immediately to ensure effective cooling for the chassis.
Version Mapping
A fan module can be installed in:
l Slot FAN1 in an S9703 chassis.
l Slots FAN1 and FAN2 in an S9706 chassis.
l Slots FAN1 to FAN4 in an S9712 chassis.
Table 6-1 Switch chassis and software versions matching a fan module
Model Name S9700
EH1M00FBX000 Wide-voltage 74 fan box Supported in V200R001C00

to V200R013C00

Appearance
Figure 6-1 Fan module
fingers
parts, keeping
us moving
Hazardo
away.
body parts
and other ʽ
᥹㾺৊⠛
᠛ᮟ䕀ᯊ
Ϲ⽕೼亢
RUN/ALM
Functions
Table 6-2 Functions of fan modules


Other fan modules are not affected when
you install or remove a fan module.
Automatic fan speed adjustment The switch provides intelligent fan speed
adjustment based on temperature in each
zone. The system monitors the temperature
of key components, and adjusts the fan
speed based on temperature changes. This
intelligent fan speed adjustment function
ensures that the system stays within the
proper operating temperature range, and
reduces power consumption and noise.
A fan module has two fans, and a failure of a fan does not immediately affect system
operations. When any fan in a fan module fails, fix the fan module as soon as possible.
Panel Description
Figure 6-2 Fan module panel

Ϲ⽕೼亢᠛ᮟ䕀ᯊ᥹㾺৊⠛ʽ
1 4
RUN/ALM
3
2
1. Air vent 2. Captive screw 3. Fan status indicator 4. Handle

Table 6-3 Indicators on a fan module panel

RUN/ALM Green Slow blinking: The fan

module is working properly,
and the communication is
normal.
Fast blinking: The fan
module is working properly,
but communication has not
been established.
Red Slow blinking: An alarm

was generated. You must
determine whether to
replace the fan module,
depending on the actual
situation.
Steady on: The fan module
has a hardware failure and
needs to be replaced.
Specifications
Table 6-4 Technical specifications of a fan module

Item Value
Dimensions (W x D x H) 323.9 mm x 74.8 mm x 126.6 mm (12.8 in.

x 2.9 in. x 5.0 in.)
Number of fans 2
Weight 1540±20 g
Maximum power consumption 116 W
Maximum wind pressure 692 Pa
Maximum wind rate 245 CFM
Maximum noise 70 dB(A)
Operating voltage range -30 V DC to -73 V DC

Item Value
Environment specifications l Operating temperature: 0°C to 45°C

(32°F to 113°F)
(-40°F to +158°F)

Hardware Description 7 Cards
7 Cards
About This Chapter
7.1 Naming Conventions

7.2 Card Types
7.3 Card Structure and Dimensions
7.4 Interface Numbering
7.5 Main Control Units and Subcards
7.6 EH1D200CMU00-Centralized Monitoring Unit
7.7 LE0D0VAMPA00-Value-Added Service Unit
7.8 EH1D2PS00P00-Open Service Platform Unit
7.9 100M Interface Cards
7.11 GE/10GE Interface Cards
7.12 10GE Interface Cards
7.14 40GE/100GE Interface Cards
7.16 POS Interface Card
7.17 User Manuals For ACU2, NGFW Module, and IPS Module (S9700)
7.1 Naming Conventions

A card name contains 12 characters, which are divided into four segments, as shown in
Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Card naming conventions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
d
c
b
a
a (the first three characters): represents the b (the fourth character): represents the
product series. component type. The letter D represents a
card.
c (the fifth character): represents the card d (the last six characters): represents the card
version, depending on the V version of the type and attributes. See Description of the
product. For example, if a card is available in Last Six Characters in a Card Name for
V200R001C00 and later versions, c is 2. the meaning of each character.
Description of the Last Six Characters in a Card Name

MPU
Figure 7-2 and Table 7-1 explain the last six characters in an MPU name.
Figure 7-2 Last six characters in an MPU name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
d
c
b
a
Table 7-1 Description of the last six characters in an MPU name
ID Description
d1 MPU type:
l MCU: Main Control Unit of the S9703
l SRU: Switching and Routing Unit of the
S9706 and S9712

ID Description
d2 l For MCUs, this character is assigned in

alphabetical order to identify MCU
types.
l For SRUs, this character represents the
switching capacity.
d3 Extended attribute. The letter C means that

the MPU has a clock daughter card. This
character is 0 by default.
d4 A number that identifies the MPU type. The

number is assigned to different types of
MPUs in ascending order from 00 to 99.
Single-interface LPU
A single-interface LPU provides only one type of interfaces. For example, an
EH1D2X12SSA0 card provides only 10GE BASE-SFP+ optical interfaces.
Figure 7-3 and Table 7-2 explain the last six characters in the name of a single-interface
LPU.
Figure 7-3 Last six characters in the name of a single-interface LPU
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1

Table 7-2 Description of the last six characters in the name of a single-interface LPU
ID Description
d1 Interface speed:
l F: 100M interface
l G: GE interface
l X: 10GE interface
l L: 40GE interface
l C: 100GE interface
d2 Number of interfaces on the LPU. The value

ranges from 00 to 99.
d3 Interface type:
l T: electrical interface
l S: SFP/SFP+ optical interface
l X: XFP optical interface
l Q: QSFP+ optical interface
d4 Card series:
l S: standard series. This series does not
support MPLS or extension of table
entries.
l F: common series. This series supports
MPLS but does not support extension of
table entries.
l E: enhanced series. This series supports
MPLS and extension of routing, ACL,
and MAC address entries.
l B: large buffer series. This series has a
large buffer and supports MPLS and
extension of routing, ACL, and MAC
address entries.
l X: X series. This series provides
programmability, and supports MPLS
and extension of routing, ACL, and
MAC address entries.

ID Description
d5 When d4 is X, this field indicates the

generation programmable card.
When d4 is not X, this field indicates the
MAC table capacity of the card:
l A: a maximum of 32K MAC address
entries and 32K FIB entries
l C: a maximum of 128K MAC address
l D: a maximum of 512K MAC address
l E: a maximum of 1M MAC address
entries and 1M FIB entries

configuration level:
l L: lightweight configuration
l S: standard configuration
l E: enhanced configuration
l H: high-level configuration
When d4 is not X, this field is a number that
identifies the LPU type. Numbers 0 to 9 are
assigned to different LPU types in
ascending order.
Multi-interface LPU
A multi-interface LPU provides interfaces of two or more types. For example, an
EH1D2T24XEA0 card provides 10GE BASE-XFP interfaces and 10M/100M/1000M BASE-
T interfaces. The interface type with the largest number of interfaces is the major interface
type, and the other interfaces are minor interfaces.
Figure 7-4 and Table 7-3 explain the last six characters in the name of a multi-interface LPU.
Figure 7-4 Last six characters in the name of a multi-interface LPU
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
Table 7-3 Description of the last six characters in the name of a multi-interface LPU
ID Description
d1 Major interface type:

l Q: QSFP+ optical interface
d2 Number of major interfaces. The value

ranges from 00 to 99.
d3 Minor interface type:

l C: combo interface
d4 Card series:
l S: standard series. This series does not
support MPLS or extension of table
entries.
l F: common series. This series supports
MPLS but does not support extension of
table entries.
l E: enhanced series. This series supports
MPLS and extension of routing, ACL,
and MAC address entries.
l B: large buffer series. This series has a
large buffer and supports MPLS and
extension of routing, ACL, and MAC
address entries.
l X: X series. This series provides
programmability, and supports MPLS
and extension of routing, ACL, and
MAC address entries.

ID Description
d5 When d4 is X, this field indicates the first

generation programmable card.
When d4 is not X, this field indicates the
MAC table capacity of the card:
l A: a maximum of 32K MAC address
l C: a maximum of 128K MAC address
l D: a maximum of 512K MAC address
l E: a maximum of 1M MAC address
entries and 1M FIB entries

configuration level:
l L: lightweight configuration
l S: standard configuration
l E: enhanced configuration
l H: high-level configuration
When d4 is not X, this field is a number that
identifies the LPU type. Numbers 0 to 9 are
assigned to different LPU types in
ascending order.
Flexible service unit

Figure 7-5 and Table 7-4 explain the last six characters in a flexible service unit name.
Figure 7-5 Last six characters in a flexible service unit name
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
d4
d3
d2
d1

Table 7-4 Description of the last six characters in a flexible service unit name
ID Description
d1 Card type. VS represents a CSS card with

SFP+ optical interfaces.
d2 Number of interfaces on the flexible service

unit. The value ranges from 00 to 99.
d3 Extended attributes. The default value is 0.
d4 A number that identifies the flexible service

unit type. The number is assigned to
different types of flexible service units in
ascending order from 00 to 99.
Value-added service card
Figure 7-6 and Table 7-5 explain the last six characters in a value-added card name.
Figure 7-6 Last six characters in a value-added card name
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
d4
d3
d2
d1
Table 7-5 Description of the last six characters in a value-added card name
ID Description
d1 Card type:
l VA: Value-added service unit
l PS: open service platform unit
d2 Reserved for function expansion. The

default value is 00.
d3 Card series. The value P represents value-

added service unit and open service
platform unit.
d4 A number that identifies the value-added

card type. The number is assigned to
different types of value-added cards in
ascending order from 00 to 99.

CMU and clock daughter card
Figure 7-7 and Table 7-6 explain the last six characters in names of the CMU and clock
daughter card.
Figure 7-7 Last six characters in names of the CMU and clock daughter card
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
d3
d2
d1
Table 7-6 Description of the last six characters in names of the CMU and clock daughter card
ID Description
d1 Card type:
l CMU: Centralized Monitoring Unit
l CKM: clock daughter card
d2 Extended attributes. The default value is 00.
d3 A number that identifies the card type. The

number is assigned to different types of
cards in ascending order from 00 to 99.
7.2 Card Types

The following describe the different types of Line Processing Units (LPUs):
l The S series includes SA and SC interface cards, for example, 24-port 100M/1000M
BASE-X interface card (SA, SFP).
l The E series includes EA, EC, ED, and EE interface cards, for example, 48-port 100M
BASE-X interface card (EA, SFP).
l The F series includes FA and FC interface cards, for example, 48-port 1000M BASE-T
interface card (FA, RJ45).
l The B series has BC interface cards, for example, 48-port 100M/1000M BASE-X
interface card (BC, SFP).
l The X series includes X1E, X2E, X2S, X2H, X5E, X5H, and X5S interface cards, for
example, 48-port 10/100/1000BASE-T interface card (X1E, RJ45).
l The POS interface cards include a WAN interface service processing card and its
subcards P4CF, P4HF, and P1UF.

l All the S9700 cards comply with the FCC standards except the EH1D2SRUDC00,
EH1D2X02XEA0, EH1D2X02XEC0, EH1D2X04XEA0, EH1D2X04XEC0,
EH1D2X04XED0, EH1D2X12SSA0, and EH1D2X08SED4.
l The FCC-certified cards must be used with the FCC-certified chassis.
Table 7-7 lists the cards supported by the S9700.
NOTE
The cards supported by a switch depend on the software version. For details, see Hardware Query Tool.
Table 7-7 Cards supported by the S9700

Card Card Card Car Supported Maxi Weig Part
Type Name Descrip d Version mum ht Num
tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
Main EH1D2S S9706/ - S9703 chassis: not 132 W 3.30 03021

control RUC000 S9712 supported (inclu kg UWG
unit Main S9706 and S9712 ding (7.28
Control chassis: supported subcar lb)
Unit C in V200R003C00 ds)
(optional to V200R013C00
clock)

control RUDC0 S9712 supported (inclu kg NXR
unit 0 Main S9706 and S9712 ding (6.39
Unit D in V200R001C00 ds)
clock)

control RUDC0 S9712 supported (inclu kg PHA
unit 1 Main S9706 and S9712 ding (6.39
Unit D in V200R001C00 ds)
clock) -
FCC
Main EH1D2 Main - S9703 chassis: 26 W 0.92 03030

control MCUAC Control supported in (inclu kg NWA
unit 00 Unit A V200R001C00 to ding (2.03
(optional V200R013C00 subcar lb)
clock) S9706 and S9712 ds)
chassis: not
supported


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
Subcard LE0D00 Clock - Supported in 6W 0.10 03020

on the CKMA0 Pinch V200R001C00 to kg PPT
main 0 Board V200R013C00 (0.22
control lb)
unit
Subcard EH1D2 8-port - S9703 chassis: not 30 W 0.50 03021

on the VS0800 10G supported kg UWH
main 0 Cluster S9706 and S9712 (1.10
control Switchin chassis: supported lb)
unit g System in V200R003C00
Service to V200R013C00
Unit
(SFP+)
Monitori EH1D20 Centraliz - S9703 chassis: not 1W 0.22 03030

ng unit 0CMU0 ed supported kg NWB
0 Monitori S9706 and S9712 (0.48
ng Unit chassis: supported lb)
in V200R001C00
to V200R013C00
Value- LE0D0V Value- - This module is 120 W 3.10 03020

added AMPA0 added supported in kg RRN
service 0 service V200R001C00 to (6.83
card card V200R008C00 lb)
(except in
V200R007C10).
OSPU EH1D2P Open - This module is 137.5 5.50 03021

S00P00 Service supported in W kg PHK
Platform V200R002C00 to (12.13
Unit V200R013C00 lb)
(except in
V200R007C10).
100M EH1D2F 48-port EA Supported in 59 W 2.50 03030

interface 48TEA0 10/100B V200R001C00 to kg NWP
card ASE-T V200R013C00 (5.51
interface lb)
card
(EA,
RJ45)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
100M EH1D2F 48-port EC Supported in 70 W 2.62 03030

interface 48TEC0 10/100B V200R001C00 to kg NWQ
card ASE-T V200R013C00 (5.78
interface lb)
card
(EC,
RJ45)
100M EH1D2F 48-Port FA Supported only in 40 W 2.30 03030

interface 48TFA0 10/100B V200R001C00, kg NXF
card ASE-T V200R002C00, and (5.07
Interface V200R003C00 lb)
Card
(FA,
RJ45)
100M EH1D2F 48-port EA Supported in 64 W 2.54 03030

interface 48SEA0 100BAS V200R001C00 to kg NWJ
card E-X V200R013C00 (5.60
interface lb)
card
(EA,
SFP)
100M EH1D2F 48-port EC Supported in 76 W 2.66 03030

interface 48SEC0 100BAS V200R001C00 to kg NWK
card E-X V200R013C00 (5.86
interface lb)
card
(EC,
SFP)
1000M EH1D2 24-Port SA Supported only in 45 W 2.22 03030

interface G24SSA 100/100 V200R001C00, kg NWV
card 0 0BASE- V200R002C00, and (4.89
X V200R003C00 lb)
Interface
Card
(SA,
SFP)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
1000M EH1D2 24-port EC Supported in 63 W 2.66 03030

interface G24SEC 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NWG
card 0 0BASE- V200R013C00 (5.86
X lb)
interface
card
(EC,
SFP)
1000M EH1D2 24-port ED Supported in 75 W 2.66 03030

interface G24SED 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NWH
card 0 0BASE- V200R013C00 (5.86
X lb)
interface
card
(ED,
SFP)
1000M ET1D2G 24-Port X5E Supported only in 84 W 2.82 03032

interface 24SX5E 100/100 V200R013C00 kg YEB
card 0BASE- (6.22
X lb)
Interface
Card
(X5E,
SFP)
1000M EH1D2S 24-Port SA Supported only in 67 W 2.26 03030

interface 24CSA0 100/100 V200R001C00, kg NWW
card 0BASE- V200R002C00, and (5.86
X and 8- V200R003C00 lb)
Port
10/100/1
000BAS
E-T
Combo
Interface
Card
(SA,
SFP/
RJ45)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
1000M EH1D2S 24-port EA Supported in 70 W 2.70 03030

interface 24CEA0 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NXD
card 0BASE- V200R013C00 (5.95
X and 8- lb)
port
10/100/1
000BAS
E-T
combo
interface
card
(EA,
SFP/
RJ45)
1000M EH1D2T 36-port EA Supported in 62 W 2.50 03030

interface 36SEA0 10/100/1 V200R001C00 to kg NXE
card 000BAS V200R013C00 (5.51
E-T and lb)
12-port
100/100
0BASE-
X
interface
card
(EA,
RJ45/
SFP)
1000M EH1D2 24-port FA Supported in 32 W 2.20 03030

interface G24TFA 10/100/1 V200R001C00 to kg NXL
card 0 000BAS V200R013C00 (4.85
E-T lb)
interface
card
(FA,
RJ45)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
1000M EH1D2 48-port EA Supported in 62 W 2.50 03030

interface G48TEA 10/100/1 V200R001C00 to kg NWL
card 0 000BAS V200R013C00 (5.51
E-T lb)
interface
card
(EA,
RJ45)

interface G48TEC 10/100/1 V200R001C00 to kg NWM
card 0 000BAS V200R013C00 (5.78
E-T lb)
interface
card
(EC,
RJ45)

interface G48TED 10/100/1 V200R001C00 to kg NWN
card 0 000BAS V200R013C00 (5.78
E-T lb)
interface
card
(ED,
RJ45)

interface G48TFA 10/100/1 V200R001C00 to kg NXH
card 0 000BAS V200R013C00 (5.51
E-T lb)
interface
card
(FA,
RJ45)
1000M EH1D2 48-port X1E Supported in 120 W 2.92 03030

interface G48TX1 10/100/1 V200R005C00 to kg RPK
card E 000BAS V200R013C00 (6.44
E-T lb)
interface
card
(X1E,
RJ45)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
1000M EH1D2 48-port BC Supported in 160 W 2.90 03030

interface G48TBC 10/100/1 V200R001C00 to kg NXK
card 0 000BAS V200R013C00 (6.39
E-T lb)
interface
card
(BC,
RJ45)
1000M ET1D2G 48-port X5E Supported only in 60 W 3.06 03032

interface 48TX5E 100/100 V200R013C00 kg WSL
card 0BASE- (6.75
T lb)
interface
card
(X5E,
RJ45)
1000M ET1D2G 48-port X5H Supported only in 107 W 3.3 kg 03032

interface 48TX5H 100/100 V200R013C00 (7.28 WSK
card 0BASE- lb)
T
interface
card
(X5H,
RJ45)
1000M ET1D2G 48-port X5S Supported only in 60 W 3.06 03032

interface 48TX5S 100/100 V200R013C00 kg WSG
card 0BASE- (6.75
T lb)
interface
card
(X5S,
RJ45)
1000M EH1D2 48-port EA Supported in 75 W 2.54 03030

interface G48SEA 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NWD
card 0 0BASE- V200R013C00 (5.60
X lb)
interface
card
(EA,
SFP)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion

interface G48SEC 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NWE
card 0 0BASE- V200R013C00 (5.86
X lb)
interface
card
(EC,
SFP)

interface G48SED 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NWF
card 0 0BASE- V200R013C00 (5.86
X lb)
interface
card
(ED,
SFP)

interface G48SFA 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NXG
card 0 0BASE- V200R013C00 (5.73
X lb)
interface
card
(FA,
SFP)
1000M EH1D2 48-port BC Supported in 185 W 2.90 03030

interface G48SBC 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NXJ
card 0 0BASE- V200R013C00 (6.39
X lb)
interface
card
(BC,
SFP)
1000M EH1D2 48-port X1E Supported in 140 W 3.04 03030

interface G48SX1 100/100 V200R005C00 to kg RPJ
card E 0BASE- V200R013C00 (6.70
X lb)
interface
card
(X1E,
SFP)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
1000M ET1D2G 48-Port EA Supported only in 62W 2.50kg 03030

interface 48TEA0 10/100/1 V200R012C00 and SGN
card 000BAS V200R013C00
E-T
Interface
Card
(EA,
RJ45)
1000M ET1D2T 36-Port EA Supported only in 62W 2.50kg 03030

interface 36SEA0 10/100/1 V200R012C00 and SGX
E-T and
12-Port
100/100
0BASE-
X
Interface
Card
(EA,
RJ45/
SFP)
1000M ET1D2G 48-Port EA Supported only in 75W 2.54kg 03030

interface 48SEA0 100/100 V200R012C00 and SGH
card 0BASE- V200R013C00
X
Interface
Card
(EA,
SFP)
1000M ET1D2G 24-Port EC Supported only in 63W 2.66kg 03030

interface 24SEC0 100/100 V200R012C00 and SGL
X
Interface
Card
(EC,
SFP)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion

interface 48TEC0 10/100/1 V200R012C00 and SGP
E-T
Interface
Card
(EC,
RJ45)

interface 48SEC0 100/100 V200R012C00 and SGJ
X
Interface
Card
(EC,
SFP)
1000M ET1D2G 48-Port X1E Supported only in 140W 3.04kg 03030

interface 48SX1E 100/100 V200R012C00 and SGD
X
Interface
Card
(X1E,
SFP)
1000M ET1D2G 48-Port X1E Supported only in 120W 2.92kg 03030

interface 48TX1E 10/100/1 V200R012C00 and SGE
E-T
Interface
Card
(X1E,
RJ45)
1000M ET1D2G 48-Port X5E Supported only in 110 W 3.1 kg 03032

interface 48SX5E 100/100 V200R013C00 (6.83 WSU
card 0BASE- lb)
X
Interface
Card
(X5E,
SFP)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
1000M ET1D2G 48-Port X5H Supported only in 162 W 3.3 kg 03032

interface 48SX5H 100/100 V200R013C00 (7.28 WSX
card 0BASE- lb)
X
Interface
Card
(X5H,
SFP)
1000M ET1D2G 48-Port X5S Supported only in 110 W 3.1 kg 03032

interface 48SX5S 100/100 V200R013C00 (6.83 WSS
card 0BASE- lb)
X
Interface
Card
(X5S,
SFP)
GE/ EH1D2T 24-port EA Supported in 53 W 2.30 03030

10GE 24XEA0 10/100/1 V200R001C00 to kg NWY
interface 000BAS V200R013C00 (5.07
card E-T and lb)
2-port
10GBAS
E-X
interface
card
(EA,
RJ45/
XFP)
GE/ EH1D2S 24-port EA Supported in 65 W 2.40 03030

10GE 24XEA0 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NXA
interface 0BASE- V200R013C00 (5.29
card X and 2- lb)
port
10GBAS
E-X
interface
card
(EA,
SFP/
XFP)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
GE/ EH1D2S 24-port EC Supported in 81 W 2.50 03030

10GE 24XEC0 100/100 V200R001C00 to kg NXN
interface 0BASE- V200R013C00 (5.51
card X and 2- lb)
port
10GBAS
E-X
interface
card
(EC,
SFP/
XFP)
GE/ EH1D2S 4-port X1E Supported in 130 W 2.88 03030

10GE 04SX1E 10GBAS V200R005C00 to kg RPL
interface E-X and V200R013C00 (6.35
card 24-port lb)
100/100
0BASE-
X and 8-
port
10/100/1
000BAS
E-T
combo
interface
card
(X1E,
RJ45/SF
P/SFP+)
GE/ ET1D2S 4-port X5E Supported only in 124 W 3.1 kg 03032

10GE 04SX5E 10GE V200R013C00 (6.83 YEA
interface SFP+ lb)
card and 44-
port GE
SFP
interface
card
(X5E,
SFP+)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
GE/ EH1D2S 8-port X1E Supported in 130 W 2.84 03030

10GE 08SX1E 10GBAS V200R005C00 to kg RPM
interface E-X and V200R013C00 (6.26
card 8-port lb)
100/100
0BASE-
X and 8-
port
10/100/1
000BAS
E-T
combo
interface
card
(X1E,
RJ45/SF
P/SFP+)
GE/ ET1D2S 24-Port X2E Supported in 201.8 3.3 kg 03031

10GE 24SX2E 10GE V200R010C00 to W (7.28 YGJ
interface SFP+ V200R013C00 lb)
card Interface
and 8-
Port GE
SFP
Interface
Card
(X2E,
SFP+)
GE/ ET1D2S 24-Port X2S Supported in 192.3 3.2 kg 03031

10GE 24SX2S 10GE V200R010C00 to W (7.05 YGG
card Interface
and 8-
Port GE
SFP
Interface
Card
(X2S,
SFP+)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
GE/ ET1D2S 16-Port X2E Supported in 192.4 3.3 kg 03031

10GE 16SX2E 10GE V200R010C00 to W (7.28 YGL
card Interface
and 16-
Port GE
SFP
Interface
Card
(X2E,
SFP+)
GE/ ET1D2S 16-Port X2S Supported in 182.4 3.2 kg 03031

10GE 16SX2S 10GE V200R010C00 to W (7.05 YGK
card Interface
and 16-
Port GE
SFP
Interface
Card
(X2S,
SFP+)
GE/ ET1D2S 4-Port X1E Supported only in 130 W 2.88 03030

10GE 04SX1E 10GBAS V200R012C00 and kg SGF
interface E-X and V200R013C00
card 24-Port
100/100
0BASE-
X and 8-
Port
10/100/1
000BAS
E-T
Combo
Interface
Card
(X1E,
RJ45/SF
P/SFP+)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
GE/ ET1D2S 8-Port X1E Supported only in 130 W 2.84 03030

10GE 08SX1E 10GBAS V200R012C00 and kg SGG
interface E-X and V200R013C00
card 8-Port
100/100
0BASE-
X and 8-
Port
10/100/1
000BAS
E-T
Combo
Interface
Card
(X1E,
RJ45/SF
P/SFP+)
10GE EH1D2 2-port EA Supported in 52 W 2.14 03030

interface X02XE 10GBAS V200R001C00 to kg NWT
card A0 E-X V200R013C00 (4.72
interface lb)
card
(EA,
XFP)
10GE EH1D2 2-port EC Supported in 61 W 2.26 03030

interface X02XE 10GBAS V200R001C00 to kg NWU
card C0 E-X V200R013C00 (4.98
interface lb)
card
(EC,
XFP)

interface X02XE 10GBAS V200R003C00 to kg RCU
card C1 E-X V200R013C00 (4.98
interface lb)
card
(EC,
XFP),
FCC


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
10GE EH1D2 4-port EA Supported in 64 W 2.16 03030

interface X04XE 10GBAS V200R001C00 to kg NWR
card A0 E-X V200R013C00 (4.76
interface lb)
card
(EA,
XFP)

interface X04XE 10GBAS V200R001C00 to kg NWS
card C0 E-X V200R013C00 (5.03
interface lb)
card
(EC,
XFP)

interface X04XE 10GBAS V200R003C00 to kg RCW
card C1 E-X V200R013C00 (5.03
interface lb)
card
(EC,
XFP),
FCC
10GE EH1D2 4-port ED Supported in 93 W 2.30 03030

interface X04XE 10GBAS V200R001C00 to kg NXC
card D0 E-X V200R013C00 (5.07
interface lb)
card
(ED,
XFP)
10GE EH1D2 8-port ED Supported in 198.1 2.50 03021

interface X08SED 10GBAS V200R002C00 to W kg TJE
card 4 E-X V200R013C00 (5.51
interface lb)
card
(ED,
SFP+)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
10GE EH1D2 8-port ED Supported in 198.1 2.50 03021

interface X08SED 10GBAS V200R002C00 to W kg TJF
card 5 E-X V200R013C00 (5.51
interface lb)
card
(ED,
SFP+)
10GE ET1D2X 8-Port X5E Supported only in 78 W 2.7 kg 03032

interface 08SX5E 10GBAS V200R013C00 (5.95 WTF
card E-X lb)
Interface
Card
(X5E,
SFP+)
10GE ET1D2X 8-Port X5H Supported only in 130 W 2.94 03032

interface 08SX5H 10GBAS V200R013C00 kg WTH
card E-X (6.48
Interface lb)
Card
(X5H,
SFP+)
10GE EH1D2 12-port SA Supported in 85 W 2.30 03030

interface X12SSA 10GBAS V200R001C00 to kg NWX
card 0 E-X V200R013C00 (5.07
interface lb)
card
(SA,
SFP+)
10GE EH1D2 16-port FC Supported in 150 W 2.60 03030

interface X16SFC 10GBAS V200R001C00 to kg NXP
card 0 E-X V200R013C00 (5.73
interface lb)
card
(FC,
SFP+)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
10GE EH1D2 16-port SC Supported in 131 W 2.80 03031

interface X16SSC 10GBAS V200R008C00 to kg HGP
card 2 E-X V200R013C00 (6.17
interface lb)
card
(SC,
SFP+)
10GE EH1D2 32-port SC Supported in 207 W 3.02 03031

interface X32SSC 10GBAS V200R008C00 to kg FSP
card 0 E-X V200R013C00 (6.66
interface lb)
card
(SC,
SFP+)
10GE ET1D2X 32-Port X2E Supported in 213.7 3.3 kg 03031

interface 32SX2E 10GBAS V200R010C00 to W (7.28 WHS
card E-X V200R013C00 lb)
Interface
Card
(X2E,
SFP+)
10GE ET1D2X 32-Port X2S Supported in 203.3 3.2 kg 03031

interface 32SX2S 10GBAS V200R010C00 to W (7.05 YGE
Interface
Card
(X2S,
SFP+)
10GE ET1D2X 32-Port X2H Supported in 214.9 3.3 kg 03032

interface 32SX2H 10GBAS V200R010C00 to W (7.28 AUQ
Interface
Card
(X2H,
SFP+)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
10GE EH1D2 40-port FC Supported in 183 W 2.90 03030

interface X40SFC 10GBAS V200R001C00 to kg NXM
card 0 E-X V200R013C00 (6.39
interface lb)
card
(FC,
SFP+)

interface X48SEC 10GBAS V200R005C00 to kg RPH
card 0 E-X V200R013C00 (7.54
interface lb)
card
(EC,
SFP+)
10GE ET1D2X 48-Port X2S Supported in 258.1 3.4 kg 03031

interface 48SX2S 10GBAS V200R010C00 to W (7.50 WJA
Interface
Card
(X2S,
SFP+)
10GE ET1D2X 12-Port SA Supported only in 85W 2.30kg 03030

interface 12SSA0 10GBAS V200R012C00 and SGY
card * E-X V200R013C00
Interface
Card
(SA,
SFP+)
10GE ET1D2X 32-Port SC Supported only in 207W 3.02kg 03031

interface 32SSC0* 10GBAS V200R012C00 and FSM
card E-X V200R013C00
Interface
Card
(SC,
SFP+)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion

interface 16SSC2* 10GBAS V200R012C00 and HGN
Interface
Card
(SC,
SFP+)

interface 16SSC0* 10GBAS V200R012C00 and SHB
Interface
Card
(SC,
SFP+)
10GE ET1D2X 4-Port EA Supported only in 64W 2.16kg 03030

interface 04XEA0 10GBAS V200R012C00 and SGR
Interface
Card
(EA,
XFP)
10GE ET1D2X 4-Port EC Supported only in 75W 2.28kg 03030

interface 04XEC1 10GBAS V200R012C00 and SGS
Interface
Card
(EC,
XFP)
10GE ET1D2X 48-Port EC Supported only in 300W 3.42kg 03030

interface 48SEC0 10GBAS V200R012C00 and SGC
Interface
Card
(EC,
SFP+)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
40GE EH1D2L 2-port FC Supported in 88 W 2.50 03021

interface 02QFC0 40GBAS V200R002C00 to kg RNK
card E-X V200R013C00 (5.51
optical lb)
interface
card
(FC,
QSFP+)
40GE EH1D2L 8-port FC Supported in 157.2 2.80 03021

interface 08QFC0 40GBAS V200R002C00 to W kg PHM
card E-X V200R013C00 (6.17
interface lb)
card
(FC,
QSFP+)
40GE EH1D2L 8-Port X2E Supported in 178.4 3.0 kg 03031

interface 08QX2E 40GBAS V200R010C00 to W (6.61 WAS
Interface
Card
(X2E,
QSFP+)
40GE ET1D2L 2-Port SC Supported only in 88W 2.50kg 03030

interface 02QSC0 40GBAS V200R012C00 and SHE
Interface
Card
(SC,
QSFP+)
40GE ET1D2L 8-Port SC Supported only in 157.2 2.80kg 03030

interface 08QSC0 40GBAS V200R012C00 and W SHF
Interface
Card
(SC,
QSFP+)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
40GE/ ET1D2H 2-Port X2S Supported in 143.5 3.05 03031

100GE 02QX2S 100GE V200R010C00 to W kg YGC
interface QSFP28 V200R013C00 (6.72
card Interface lb)
and 2-
Port
40GE
QSFP+
Interface
Card
(X2S,
QSFP28
)
40GE/ ET1D2H 2-Port X2E Supported in 153.1 3.15 03031

100GE 02QX2E 100GE V200R010C00 to W kg YGD
interface QSFP28 V200R013C00 (6.94
card Interface lb)
and 2-
Port
40GE
QSFP+
Interface
Card
(X2E,
QSFP28
)
100GE EH1D2 2-port EE Supported in 339 W 4.20 03030

interface C02FEE 100GBA V200R008C00 to kg RYF
card 0 SE-X V200R013C00 (9.26
interface lb)
card
(EE,
CFP)
100GE ET1D2C 4-Port X2E Supported in 164.8 3.15 03031

interface 04HX2E 100GE V200R010C00 to W kg YET
card QSFP28 V200R013C00 (6.94
Interface lb)
Card
(X2E,
QSFP28
)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
100GE ET1D2C 4-Port X2S Supported in 154.7 3.05 03031

interface 04HX2S 100GE V200R010C00 to W kg WHR
card QSFP28 V200R013C00 (6.72
Interface lb)
Card
(X2S,
QSFP28
)
100GE ET1D2C 2-Port EE Supported only in 339W 4.20kg 03030

interface 02FEE0 100GBA V200R012C00 and WVE
card SE-X V200R013C00
Interface
Card
(EE,
CFP)
POS EH1D2 WAN - Supported only in l Wi 3.80 -

interface WM000 interface V200R001C00, th kg
card 00 service V200R002C00, and tw (8.38
processi V200R003C00 o lb)
ng card P1 (with a
UF firepro
s: of
84 panel
W and
l Wi two
th P1UFs
tw )
o
P4
HF
s:
91
W
l Wi
th
tw
o
P4
CF
s:
86
W


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
POS P1UF 1-port - Supported only in 12 W 0.50 -

interface OC-48c/ V200R001C00, kg
card STM-16 V200R002C00, and (1.10
c POS- V200R003C00 lb)
SFP
flexible
card
(installe
d on a
WAN
interface
service
processi
ng card)
POS P4HF 4-port - Supported only in 15 W 0.50 -

card STM-4c V200R002C00, and (1.10
POS- V200R003C00 lb)
SFP
flexible
card
(installe
d on a
WAN
interface
service
processi
ng card)
POS P4CF 4-port - Supported only in 14 W 0.50 -

card STM-1c V200R002C00, and (1.10
POS- V200R003C00 lb)
SFP
flexible
card
(installe
d on a
WAN
interface
service
processi
ng card)


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
ACU2 ACU2 WLAN - Supported in - - -

module NOTE ACU2 V200R005C00 to
This Access V200R013C00
module Controll
is er Unit
support
(128 AP
ed in
V200R Control
005C00 Resourc
to e
V200R Included
013C00 )
(except
in NOTE
V200R For
007C10 details,
). see
manual
s of the
ACU2
card.
Firewall ET1D2F NGFW - Supported in - - -

module W00S00 module V200R005C00 to
NOTE A, with V200R013C00
This HW
module general
is security
support
platform
ed in
V200R software
005C00 NOTE
to For
V200R details,
013C00 see
(except manual
in s of the
V200R NGFW
007C10 card.
).


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion

module W00S01 module V200R005C00 to
NOTE B, with V200R013C00
This HW
module general
is security
support
platform
ed in
V200R software
005C00 NOTE
to For
V200R details,
013C00 see
(except manual
in s of the
V200R NGFW
007C10 card.
).

module W00S02 Module V200R005C00 to
NOTE C, with V200R013C00
This HW
module General
is Security
support
Platform
ed in
V200R Software
005C00 NOTE
to For
V200R details,
013C00 see
(except manual
in s of the
V200R NGFW
007C10 card.
).


tion Seri Powe ber
es r
Cons
umpt
ion
IPS ET1D2I IPS - Supported in - - -

module PS0S00 module V200R005C00 to
NOTE A, with V200R013C00
This HW
module general
is security
support
platform
ed in
V200R software
005C00 NOTE
to For
V200R details,
013C00 see
(except manual
in s of the
V200R IPS
007C10 card.
).
7.3 Card Structure and Dimensions
Card Structure
Figure 7-8 shows an example of a card.
Figure 7-8 Card

9 8 7
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Name label 2. Ejector lever 3. Front panel plate

4. Port 5. Button 6. Indicator
7. Clock daughter card slot 8. Printed circuit board (PCB) 9. Positioning pin
A card consists of the following components:
l PCB
The PCB contains all the functional chips and is the core of the card. The PCB provides
indicators, buttons, and ports on the front panel. PCBs of some cards provide a clock
daughter card slot.
NOTE
Indicators, buttons, and ports on a card vary depending on the card model. Some cards support clock
daughter cards, while others do not. For details, see the description of specific cards.
l Front panel, made of the following parts:
– Captive screws: fix the card into the chassis.
– Ejector levers: allow you to insert and remove the card.
– Plate: connects the ejector levers and PCB to the panel. Some labels are attached on
the plate.
Card Dimensions
Figure 7-9 shows how the dimensions (width, depth, and height) of a card are defined.
Figure 7-9 Card dimensions
*KVZN
RUN/ALM
46 47
44 75
42 43
40 41
38 39
36 37
34 35
32 33
30 31
28 29
26 27
24 25
22 23
20 21
18 19
16 17
14 15
12 13
.KOMNZ
10 11
8 9
6 7
4 5
2 3
1
=OJZN
Table 7-8 Card dimensions

Card Type Dimensions (W x D x H)
MCU 194.5 mm x 426.8 mm x 19.9 mm (7.66 in. x 16.80 in.

x 0.78 in.)
SRU 394.7 mm x 426.8 mm x 35.1 mm (15.54 in. x 16.80

in. x 1.38 in.)
CMU 112.9 mm x 412.7 mm x 19.8 mm (4.44 in. x 16.25 in.

x 0.78 in.)

Card Type Dimensions (W x D x H)
LPU 394.7 mm x 426.8 mm x 35.1 mm (15.54 in. x 16.80

in. x 1.38 in.)
CKM 100.0 mm x 145.0 mm x 2.0 mm (9.94 in. x 5.71 in. x

0.08 in.)
VSU 213.0 mm x 151.8 mm x 35.1 mm (8.39 in. x 5.98 in.

x 1.38 in.)
NOTE
The card dimensions are defined as follows:

l Depth: the distance between the outer edge of an ejector lever and the end of the PCB
l Width: the longest distance between the outer edges of two ejector levers
l Height: the height of the front panel
7.4 Interface Numbering
Physical Interface Numbering Rules

Physical interfaces are numbered in the following way:
A single switch uses slot ID/subcard ID/interface ID to identify physical interfaces.
A CSS switch uses frame ID/slot ID/subcard ID/interface ID to identify physical interfaces.
l Frame ID: indicates the ID of a switch in the CSS. The value is 1 or 2.
l Slot ID: indicates the number of the slot where a card is located.
l Subcard ID: indicates the ID of a subcard.
l Interface sequence number: indicates the sequence number of an interface on the card.
Physical interface IDs on LPUs are numbered as follows:
l If there is only one row of interfaces on the panel, the interfaces are numbered from left
to right, starting with 0.
l If there are two rows of interfaces on the panel, the interfaces are numbered from top to
bottom and left to right, starting from 0.
NOTE
If an LPU has interfaces of different speeds, the interfaces of each speed are numbered separately. For
example, an EH1D2S04SX1E card has 10GE and GE interfaces. The 10GE and GE interfaces are both
numbered from left to right, starting from 0.

If a card is inserted in slot 3 of a switch, the interface with interface ID 2 (see figures above
for interface ID numbering) is numbered 3/0/2. If the switch is in a CSS and the CSS ID is 1,
the interface is numbered 1/3/0/4.
100GE optical interfaces and some 40GE optical interfaces can be split into multiple
interfaces. The converted interfaces are numbered using the following rules:
l If the 40GE interface is numbered 40GEx/0/n, the four converted 10GE interfaces are
numbered XGEx/1/(4n + z). For example, if a 40GE interface is numbered 40GE1/0/1,
the four converted 10GE interfaces are numbered XGE1/1/4, XGE1/1/5, XGE1/1/6, and
XGE1/1/7.
If a 40GE interface is numbered 40GE x/1/n, the four converted 10GE interfaces are
numbered XGE x/2/(4n + z + 8). For example, if a 40GE interface is numbered
40GE1/1/1, the four converted 10GE interfaces are numbered XGE1/2/12, XGE1/2/13,
XGE1/2/14, and XGE1/2/15.
– x: indicates the slot number of the card.
– n: indicates the sequence number of the 40GE interface. The value starts from 0.
– z: indicates the interface location. The value ranges from 0 to 3.
l After the 100GE interfaces are split, the subcard number and interface sequence number
of converted interfaces are fixed. Table 7-9 describes the numbering rules.
Table 7-9 Numbering rule for interfaces converted from a 100GE interface
100GE Numbers of Numbers of Numbers of Numbers of
Interface Converted Ten Four Four
Number 40GE Converted Converted Converted
Interfaces 10GE 10GE 10GE
(Only Interfaces Interfaces Interfaces
Applicable (Only (Only (Only
to Applicable Applicable Applicable
EH1D2C02F to to to
EE0 Cards) EH1D2C02F ET1D2C04H ET1D2H02Q
EE0 Cards) X2E and X2E and
ET1D2C04H ET1D2H02Q
X2S Cards) X2S Cards)
100GE x/0/0 40GE x/1/0 XGE x/2/0 to XGE x/1/0 to XGE x/2/0 to
40GE x/1/1 XGE x/2/9 XGE x/1/3 XGE x/2/3
100GE x/0/1 40GE x/1/2 XGE x/2/10 to XGE x/1/4 to XGE x/2/4 to
40GE x/1/3 XGE x/2/19 XGE x/1/7 XGE x/2/7
100GE x/0/2 - - XGE x/1/8 to -

XGE x/1/11
100GE x/0/3 - - XGE x/1/12 to -

XGE x/1/15
7.5 Main Control Units and Subcards

NOTE
Main control units of different models cannot be used in the same chassis.
7.5.1 EH1D2SRUC000-S9706/S9712 Main Control Unit C

(Optional Clock)
Version Mapping
Table 7-10 Switch chassis and software versions matching the card
Card Name S9703 Chassis S9706 and S9712 Chassis
EH1D2SRUC000 Not supported Supported in V200R003C00

to V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2SRUC000 integrates control and switching functions and provides the control
plane, management plane, and data plane for the system. This card provides a clock daughter
card slot.
An EH1D2SRUC000 card can be installed in:
l Slots 07 and 08 in an S9706 chassis.
Figure 7-10 Appearance of the EH1D2SRUC000
Functions
The EH1D2SRUC000 integrates control and switching functions and provides the control
plane, management plane, and data plane, which are described as follows:
l The control plane is responsible for protocol processing, service processing, route
computing, forwarding control, service scheduling, traffic statistics collection, and
system security.
l The management plane is responsible for system status monitoring, environment
monitoring, log and alarm processing, system software loading, and system upgrades.
l The data plane provides high-speed, non-blocking data channels to implement service
switching between service modules.
The EH1D2SRUC000 consists of the following modules:

l Control module: provides the control and management plane for the EH1D2SRUC000
and the entire system, implementing protocol processing, route computing, forwarding
control, system management, and system security.
l Switching module: provides the data plane and high-speed service channels for service
switching.
l Local clock module: provides a working clock for chips of the control module, switching
module, and device management and monitoring module.
l Device management and monitoring module: provides a controller area network bus
(CAN Bus) module to monitor the EH1D2SRUC000 and manage the CAN Bus modules
of LPUs.
l Power supply module: provides power for the EH1D2SRUC000.
Table 7-11 Functions of the EH1D2SRUC000
Basic functions The EH1D2SRUC000 is the system control and management unit for
the S9712 and S9706. It integrates the main control unit, clock unit,
switching unit, and system maintenance unit.
Distributed Performs concurrent data forwarding using a distributed data plane.

forwarding
Memory 2 GB
Flash 128 MB
CF card 512 MB by default

By default, the system configuration data, startup files, system software
package, and system logs are saved to the CF card.
CSS The EH1D2SRUC000 can have EH1D2VS08000 installed to provide

the CSS service.
Clock The EH1D2SRUC000 can have LE0D00CKMA00 installed to provide

stratum-3 clock, synchronous Ethernet, and IEEE 1588v2 functions.
Redundancy Supported
backup MPUs are mandatory for switches. You can configure one or two
MPUs for each switch. The MPU can be installed in either MPU slot of
a switch. An MPU consists of the control plane, management plane,
and data forwarding plane. When two MPUs are installed, the two
MPUs work in hot standby mode on the control and management
planes and work in load balancing mode on the data forwarding plane.
MPUs monitor each other. When the active MPU is faulty, the standby
MPU is automatically switched to be the active MPU to ensure service
continuity.

Before removing the active EH1D2SRUC000 card, perform an active/
standby switchover.

Usage Constraints
l Main control units of different models cannot be used in the same chassis.
l The two SRUs in the same chassis must be both configured with or without a subcard.
l The fans in a switch work in intelligent speed adjustment mode after a switchover between
the active and standby main control units in the switch. If the fans run at a specified speed
before a switchover, run the set fan-speed command after the switchover to set the fan
speed again.
Indicators and Ports
Figure 7-11 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2SRUC000 panel

1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CSS ID
SYNC ACT RUN/ALM
RST
CLK1 CLK2 CONSOLE ETH
4 5
Table 7-12 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2SRUC000 panel
Number Indicator/ Color Description

Button
1 SYNC Green Steady on: The switch supports

time and clock synchronization,
and a clock daughter card is
installed on the SRU.
Off: The switch supports time and
clock synchronization, but no clock
daughter card is installed on the
SRU.
2 CSS ID Green There are eight CSS ID indicators

on the panel, but only one is on at a
time.
l CSS ID N is steady on: The
CSS ID of the local chassis is N.
l All CSS ID indicators are off:
The chassis is not running the
CSS service.


Button
3 RUN/ALM: Green Steady on: The card has been

running status powered on, but the software is not
indicator running.
Slow blinking: The card software is
running properly.
Fast blinking: The card software is
starting.
Red Steady on: The switch has a 1600

W DC power module installed or
experiences a card failure. Manual
intervention is required.
Yellow Steady on: The card is powered off.
4 ACT: active/ Green Steady on: The card is the active

standby status SRU.
indicator Off: The card is the standby SRU.
NOTE
When two chassis set up a CSS, the
indicator reads as follows:
Steady on: The card is the active SRU
of the CSS.
Blinking: The card is the hot standby
SRU of the CSS.
Off: The card is the cold standby SRU
of the CSS.
5 RST button - Press this button to reset the card.

NOTE
Resetting an SRU causes service
interruption. Do not press the RST
button unless necessary.
Figure 7-12 Ports on the EH1D2SRUC000 panel

1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CSS ID
SYNC ACT RUN/ALM
RST
CLK1 CLK2 CONSOLE ETH
1 One subcard slot. EH1D2VS08000 can be installed in this slot.

2 One USB port. In V200R005C00 to V200R013C00, a USB flash drive
can be inserted into this port to load the system software to the switch
during device deployment.

3 Two BITS ports. Ports CLK1 and CLK2 on the SRU map ports BITS0
and BITS1 on the clock daughter card. BITS devices or other products
can connect to BITS ports to synchronize the time and clock.
4 One console management port. A configuration terminal can connect to
this port to implement onsite configuration.
5 One ETH management port (10/100BASE-TX auto-sensing). A
configuration terminal or network management workstation can connect
to this port to set up a local or remote configuration environment.
ETH management port

A switch can connect to a configuration terminal or network management workstation
through the ETH management port for onsite or remote configuration. The port must use a 8.6
Ethernet Cable. Table 7-13 describes the attributes of an ETH management port.
Table 7-13 ETH management port attributes

Attribute Description
Connector type RJ45
Standards compliance IEEE802.3
Working mode 10/100 Mbit/s auto-sensing

Full-duplex
Maximum transmission distance 100 m
Console management port

A configuration terminal or network management workstation connects to the console
management port for onsite configuration. The port must use a 8.4 Console Cable. The
console management port is used when a switch is powered on for the first time. Table 7-14
describes the attributes of a console management port.
Table 7-14 Console management port attributes

Connector type RJ45
Working mode Duplex Universal Asynchronous Receiver/

Transmitter (UART)
Standards compliance RS232
Baud rate 9600 bit/s to 115200 bit/s

Default value: 9600 bit/s
BITS port

Table 7-15 BITS port attributes

Connector type RJ45
Working mode Clock synchronization mode: full-duplex

Time synchronization mode: half-duplex
Frame format l 1 pps + time of day (ToD)

l DC level shifter (DCLS)
l 2 MHz
l 2 Mbit/s: HDB3 code
l 1.544 Mbit/s: B8ZS code
Standards l 1 pps + ToD

compliance – NMEA-0183
– ToD standard of China Mobile
l DCLS: standard of DCLS signals
l 2 MHz: G.703
l 2 Mbit/s: G.703
l 1.544 Mbit/s: G.703
Cable used Time synchronization mode: straight-through Ethernet cable (RS422

signal)
Clock synchronization mode: E1/T1 cable (120-ohm balanced cable)
For details about cable parameters, see Clock Cable.
USB port
A USB flash drive can be inserted into the USB port to transfer configuration files, software
packages, or other files required for the switch during device deployment. Table 7-16 lists the
attributes of the USB port.
Table 7-16 USB port attributes

Connector type USB A
Standards compliance USB2.0

Specifications
Table 7-17 EH1D2SRUC000 specifications

Item Description
Physical l Dimensions (W x D x H): 394.7 mm x 426.8 mm x 35.1 mm (5.7

specifications in. x 7.3 in. x 0.8 in.)
l Weight: 3.30 kg (7.28 lb)
l Maximum power consumption 132 W (including subcards)
Environment l Operating temperature: 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)

specifications l Operating relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH (noncondensing)
l Storage temperature: -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
l Storage relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Ordering Information
Card ordering information is subject to updates with product version upgrades. The ordering
information provided in this manual is for reference only. To obtain the latest ordering
information, contact Huawei switch distributors or Huawei local office.
Table 7-18 Ordering information

Part Number Card Description Card Model
03021UWG S9706/S9712 Main Control EH1D2SRUC000

Unit C (Optional Clock)
7.5.2 EH1D2SRUDC00-S9706/S9712 Main Control Unit D

(Optional Clock)
Version Mapping
EH1D2SRUDC00 Not supported Supported in V200R001C00

to V200R013C00
Introduction
An EH1D2SRUDC00 card can be installed in:


Figure 7-13 Appearance of the EH1D2SRUDC00
Functions
The EH1D2SRUDC00 integrates control and switching functions. It provides the control
system security.
switching between service modules. Two SRUs in a chassis can work in hot standby
mode.
The EH1D2SRUDC00 consists of the following function modules:
l Control module: provides the control and management plane for the EH1D2SRUDC00
l Switching module: provides the system data plane and provides high-speed service
channels to implement service switching.
module, and device management and monitoring module on the EH1D2SRUDC00.
l Device management and monitoring module: provides the controller area network bus
(CAN Bus) module to monitor the EH1D2SRUDC00 and manage the CAN Bus modules
of LPUs.
l Power supply module: provides power for the EH1D2SRUDC00.
l Value-added service module: provides enhanced services such as operation,
administration and maintenance (OAM) and bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD).

Table 7-20 Functions of the EH1D2SRUDC00

Basic function The EH1D2SRUDC00 is the system control and management unit for
the S9712 and S9706. They integrate the main control unit, clock unit,

forwarding
OAM l 802.1ag: identifies, detects, and sends continuity check (CC)

packets.
l Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS OAM): identifies, detects,
and sends MPLS OAM packets.
l OAM UNCFG_MEP.
Memory 2 GB
Flash 128 MB

Clock The EH1D2SRUDC00 can have LE0D00CKMA00 installed to provide

continuity.

Before removing the active EH1D2SRUDC00 card, perform an active/
standby switchover.

Usage Constraints
speed again.
Figure 7-14 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2SRUDC00 panel

1 234
CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH
SYNC
ACT RUN/ALM
RST
Table 7-21 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2SRUDC00 panel

Button

clock synchronization but no clock
SRU.

NOTE
Resetting a card causes service


Button
3 ACT: active/ Green Steady on: The card is in active

standby status state.
indicator Off: The card is in standby state.
NOTE
of the CSS.
SRU of the CSS.
of the CSS.

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

Figure 7-15 Ports on the EH1D2SRUDC00 panel

1 2 3
CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH
SYNC
ACT RUN/ALM
RST
1 Two BITS ports. The CLK1 and CLK2 ports on the SRU map the BITS0
and BITS1 ports on the clock daughter card. BITS ports connect to BITS
devices or connected to the BITS ports of other products to synchronize
the time and clock.
2 One Console management port. A configuration terminal can connect to
this port to implement onsite configuration of the S9700.
3 One ETH management port (10M/100M BASE-TX auto-sensing). A

ETH management port

Connector type RJ45

Full-duplex

Connector type RJ45

Transmitter (UART)

BITS port
Connector type RJ45



l 2 MHz

l 2 MHz: G.703 standard
l 2 Mbit/s: G.703 standard
l 1.544 Mbit/s: G.703 standard

signal)
Specifications
Table 7-25 Specifications of the EH1D2SRUDC00

Item Description

l Maximum power consumption: 180 W (including subcards)



03030NXR S9706/S9712 Main Control EH1D2SRUDC00

Unit D (Optional Clock)
7.5.3 EH1D2SRUDC01-S9706/S9712 Main Control Unit D

(Optional Clock)
Version Mapping
EH1D2SRUDC01 Not supported Supported in V200R001C00

to V200R013C00
Introduction
An EH1D2SRUDC01 card can be installed in:

Figure 7-16 Appearance of the EH1D2SRUDC01
Functions
The EH1D2SRUDC01 integrates control and switching functions. It provides the control
system security.


switching between service modules. Two SRUs in a chassis can work in hot standby
mode.
The EH1D2SRUDC01 consists of the following function modules:
l Control module: provides the control and management plane for the EH1D2SRUDC01
l Switching module: provides the system data plane and provides high-speed service
channels to implement service switching.
module, and device management and monitoring module on the EH1D2SRUDC01.
l Device management and monitoring module: provides the controller area network bus
(CAN Bus) module to monitor the EH1D2SRUDC01 and manage the CAN Bus modules
of LPUs.
l Power supply module: provides power for the EH1D2SRUDC01.
l Value-added service module: provides enhanced services such as operation,
administration and maintenance (OAM) and bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD).
Table 7-28 Functions of the EH1D2SRUDC01

Basic function The EH1D2SRUDC01 is the system control and management unit for
the S9712 and S9706. They integrate the main control unit, clock unit,

forwarding
OAM l 802.1ag: identifies, detects, and sends continuity check (CC)

packets.
l Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS OAM): identifies, detects,
and sends MPLS OAM packets.
l OAM UNCFG_MEP.
Memory 2 GB
Flash 128 MB

Clock The EH1D2SRUDC01 can have LE0D00CKMA00 installed to provide


continuity.

Before removing the active EH1D2SRUDC01 card, perform an active/
standby switchover.
Usage Constraints
speed again.
Figure 7-17 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2SRUDC01 panel

1 234
CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH
SYNC
ACT RUN/ALM
RST

Table 7-29 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2SRUDC01 panel

Button

clock synchronization but no clock
SRU.

NOTE
Resetting a card causes service
3 ACT: active/ Green Steady on: The card is in active

standby status state.
indicator Off: The card is in standby state.
NOTE
of the CSS.
SRU of the CSS.
of the CSS.

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.


Figure 7-18 Ports on the EH1D2SRUDC01 panel

1 2 3
CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH
SYNC
ACT RUN/ALM
RST
1 Two BITS ports. The CLK1 and CLK2 ports on the SRU map the BITS0
and BITS1 ports on the clock daughter card. BITS ports connect to BITS
devices or connected to the BITS ports of other products to synchronize
the time and clock.
2 One Console management port. A configuration terminal can connect to
3 One ETH management port (10M/100M BASE-TX auto-sensing). A
ETH management port


Connector type RJ45

Full-duplex


Connector type RJ45


Transmitter (UART)

BITS port

Connector type RJ45


l 2 MHz


signal)

Specifications
Table 7-33 Specifications of the EH1D2SRUDC01

Item Description



03030PHA S9706/S9712 Main Control EH1D2SRUDC01

Unit D (Optional Clock) -
FCC
7.5.4 EH1D2MCUAC00-S9703 Main Control Unit A (Optional

Clock)
Version Mapping
EH1D2MCUAC00 Supported in V200R001C00 Not supported

to V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2MCUAC00 can be installed in slots 04 and 05 in an S9703 chassis.

Figure 7-19 Appearance of the EH1D2MCUAC00
Functions
The EH1D2MCUAC00 is the main control unit of the S9703. It integrates the control unit
(Optional Clock) unit, and system maintenance unit, and provides the following functions:
l Provides channels for out-of-band communication between cards.
l Provides high-precision stratum-3 clock and synchronous Ethernet clock. These clock
features ensure clock synchronization between ports and LPUs.
l Monitors system operation. The EH1D2MCUAC00 periodically collects operation data
of different units. According to running status of the units, the EH1D2MCUAC00
generates control information to check card presence, control fabric running status,
perform port switching, reset the forwarding engine, and increase the fan speed.
l Functions as the proxy of the network management software: The EH1D2MCUAC00
manages and maintains the switch through management ports (console port and Ethernet
port).
l Stores configuration data, startup files, accounting information, upgrade software, and
system logs. The EH1D2MCUAC00 provides a CF card to store data files as a mass
storage device.
Table 7-36 Functions of the EH1D2MCUAC00

Basic function Integrates the main control unit, clock unit, and system maintenance
unit.

forwarding
Memory 512 MB
Flash 64 MB
CF card 512 MB
Clock The EH1D2MCUAC00 can have LE0D00CKMA00 installed to

provide IEEE 1588v2 functions, synchronous Ethernet, and stratum-3
clock.

backup Main control board is mandatory for switches. Each switch must be
configured with one or two main control boards. When one main
control board is configured for a switch, the main control board can be
installed in either main control board slot of the switch. When two main
control boards are configured, the two main control boards work in hot
standby mode to improve reliability of the switch. The active and
standby main control boards monitor the status of each other. If the
active main control board fails, the standby main control board
automatically becomes active to ensure uninterrupted services.

Before removing the active EH1D2MCUAC00 card, perform an active/
standby switchover.
Usage Constraints
speed again.
Figure 7-20 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2MCUAC00 panel

1 2 34
SYNC
RST ACT RUN/ALM

CLK1 CLK2 RS485 MON CON ETH

Table 7-37 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2MCUAC00 panel

Button

installed on the MCU.
clock synchronization, but no clock
MCU.

standby status MCU.
indicator Off: The card is the standby MCU.

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

Figure 7-21 Ports on the EH1D2MCUAC00 panel

1 2 3 4 5
SYNC
ACT RUN/ALM
RST
CLK1 CLK2 RS485 MON CON ETH
1 Two BITS ports. The CLK1 and CLK2 ports on the MCU map the BITS0
and BITS1 ports on the clock daughter card. BITS devices or other
products can connect to BITS ports to synchronize the time and clock.
2 One RS485 port (reserved).
3 One MON port (reserved).

5 One ETH management port (10/100BASE-TX auto-sensing). A

ETH management port


Connector type RJ45

Full-duplex


Connector type RJ45

Transmitter (UART)

BITS port


Connector type RJ45


l 2 MHz


signal).
Specifications
Table 7-41 Specifications of the EH1D2MCUAC00

Item Description



03030NWA S9703 Main Control Unit A EH1D2MCUAC00

(Optional Clock)
7.5.5 LE0D00CKMA00 Clock Pinch Board,-1588
Version Mapping
Table 7-43 Switch chassis and software versions matching the CKM daughter card
Card Name S9700 Chassis
LE0D00CKMA00 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The LE0D00CKMA00 is a daughter card installed in the main control unit of the S9700 to
provide clock and time synchronization. This card has two Building Integrated Timing Supply
(BITS) ports.
The LE0D00CKMA00 can be used in the EH1D2SRUC000, EH1D2SRUDC00,

EH1D2SRUDC01 and EH1D2MCUAC00.
Figure 7-22 Appearance of the LE0D00CKMA00

Functions
The LE0D00CKMA00 consists of the following functional units:
l Clock synchronization unit (synchronous Ethernet clock)

l Time synchronization unit (IEEE 1588 module)
The LE0D00CKMA00 provides the following functions:
l Provides the 19.44 MHz system clock and external clock signals. The output clock signal
complies with the ITU-T G.813 standard.
l Implements the IEEE 1588 protocol to ensure time synchronization on the network.
Time synchronization accuracy is within 0.1 us, which complies with the 1588v2
protocol.
Usage Constraints
If the switch is equipped with two MPUs, you must install clock daughter cards on both the
active and standby MPUs.
Components and Ports
Figure 7-23 Components on the LE0D00CKMA00
2 1
Table 7-44 Components on the LE0D00CKMA00

Number Component Description
1 Stud The studs fix the clock daughter card on the

MPU.

Number Component Description
2 Double-edge The clock daughter card uses these

connector connectors to exchange signals with the
MPU.
The LE0D00CKMA00 has two BITS ports, which are presented by CLK1 and CLK2 on the
MPU, as shown in Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 BITS ports of the LE0D00CKMA00 on the MPU panel

1 2
CLK1 CLK2 CON ETH
SYNC
ACT RUN/ALM
RST
Table 7-45 Ports on the LE0D00CKMA00
Number Port on the Port on the Description

MPU Panel LE0D00CKM
A00
1 CLK1 BITS0 A BITS port can be configured as

an input or output port.
2 CLK2 BITS1
l Input port: receives 2.048 MHz
clock signals, 2.048 Mbit/s clock
signals, 1.544 Mbit/s clock
signals, 1 pulse per second (pps)
clock signals, or DC level shift
(DCLS) code streams from the
upstream device and generates
19.44 MHz clock signals for the
system. The BITS port also
obtains time information and
provides time information for
LPUs.
l Output port: sends 2.048 MHz
clock signals, 2.048 Mbit/s clock
signals, 1.544 Mbit/s clock
signals, 1 pps clock signals, or
DCLS code streams to the
downstream device.
BITS port


Connector type RJ45
Working mode Transmission rate

l Clock synchronization: 2 MHz, 2 Mbps,
1.544 Mbps
l Time synchronization: 9600 bit/s (full-
duplex mode supported)
Standards compliance Clock synchronization: E1 and T1

Time synchronization: DCLS and time of
day (ToD)
Specifications
Table 7-47 Specifications of the LE0D00CKMA00

Item Description
Physical l Dimensions (W x D x H): 100.0 mm x 145.0 mm x 2.0 mm (3.9 in.

specifications x 5.7 in. x 0.08 in.)
l Maximum power consumption: 6 W


03020PPT Clock Pinch Board LE0D00CKMA00

7.5.6 EH1D2VS08000-8-Port 10G Cluster Switching System

Service Unit (SFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2VS08000 Not supported Supported in V200R003C00

to V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2VS08000 provides eight 10GE optical ports, which can only be used for cluster
connection and cannot be used for data transmission and switching.
The EH1D2VS08000 can be installed in the subcard slot of an EH1D2SRUC000.
Figure 7-25 Appearance of the EH1D2VS08000
Functions
Switches connected through optical ports on the EH1D2VS08000 cards form a cluster switch
system (CSS) and are considered as one device. You can log in to the master switch to
manage all the switches in the CSS.
Usage Constraints
To run the CSS service on a chassis, both SRUs in the chassis must have an EH1D2VS08000
card installed.
The EH1D2VS08000 is not hot swappable in the S9700.

Figure 7-26 Indicators on the EH1D2VS08000 panel

3
RUN/ALM
LINK/ALM
MASTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VS08
21
Table 7-50 Indicators on the EH1D2VS08000 panel

Number Indicator Color Description

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.
Red Steady on: The card has failed and

the fault requires manual
intervention.
2 MASTER: Green Steady on: The SRU with the

master/slave EH1D2VS08000 card installed is
status indicator the master SRU of the CSS.
Off: The SRU with the
EH1D2VS08000 card installed is
not the master SRU of the CSS.
3 LINK/ALM Green Steady on: The link status of the

CSS port is Up.
Red Steady on: The cable is connected

incorrectly to the CSS port.
- Off: The link status of the CSS port

is Down.

Figure 7-27 Ports on the EH1D2VS08000 panel

1
RUN/ALM
LINK/ALM
MASTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VS08
1 Eight 10G BASE-SFP+ optical ports
10G BASE-SFP+ optical port
Table 7-51 lists the attributes of a 10G BASE-SFP+ optical port.
Table 7-51 10G BASE-SFP+ optical port attributes

Connector type SFP+
Optical port attribute l When a 1 m, 3 m, 5 m, or 10 m (active)

SFP+ - SFP+ high-speed cable is
connected to the optical port, the port
attributes are determined by the SFP+ -
SFP+ high-speed cable.
l When an active optical cable is
connected to the optical port, the port
attributes are determined by the SFP+
optical cable.
l When an optical module is installed on
the optical port, the port attributes are
determined by the optical module
attributes. For details, see 9.10 10GE
SFP+ Optical Modules.
Ports on each EH1D2VS08000 card are divided into two groups: group 1 with ports 1, 2, 3,
and 4, and group 2 with ports 5, 6, 7, and 8. When chassis 1 and chassis 2 need to set up a
cluster, use either of the following methods to connect their CSS cards:
Two groups with the same group ID in different chassis must be connected by at least one
cluster cable. The ports in the two groups can be connected in any sequence. For example, any
port in group 1 in chassis 1 can be connected to any port in group 1 in chassis 2.

l Method 1: Connect group 1 of card 1 to group 1 of card 3, group 2 of card 1 to group 2

of card 4, group 1 of card 2 to group 1 of card 4, and group 2 of card 2 to group 2 of card
3, as shown in Figure 7-28.
Figure 7-28 Cable connections on EH1D2VS08000 cards (only applicable to S9700

switches)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SRU SRU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SRU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SRU
Group1
Group2
Cable
NOTE
These figures use solid lines and dashed lines in different colors to help you differentiate the cable
connections clearly. This is not intended to represent specific cable types.
l Method 2: Connect group 1 of card 1 to group 1 of card 4, group 2 of card 1 to group 2

of card 3, group 1 of card 2 to group 1 of card 3, and group 2 of card 2 to group 2 of card
4, as shown in Figure 7-29.

Figure 7-29 Cable connections on EH1D2VS08000 cards (only applicable to S9700

switches)
Chassis 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CSS ID
Card 1
EH1D2
RUN/ALM
ACT RUN/ALM
EH1D2
08
SRUC000 LINK/ALM SYNC SRUC000
MASTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VS08 CLK1 CLK2 CONSOLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CSS ID
Card 2
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
SRUC000
MASTER
LINK/ALM SYNC ACT RUN/ALM
EH1D2
SRUC000 07
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
G48TFA0
Chassis 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Card 3
CSS ID
EH1D2
RUN/ALM
ACT RUN/ALM
EH1D2
LINK/ALM
SRUC000
MASTER
SYNC SRUC000
08
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CSS ID
Card 4
RUN/ALM
07
EH1D2
ACT RUN/ALM
EH1D2
SRUC000 LINK/ALM SYNC SRUC000

MASTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Group 1
Group 2
RUN/ALM
EH1D2
G48TFA0
Cables
Specifications
Table 7-52 EH1D2VS08000 specifications

Item Description



03021UWH 8-Port 10G Cluster EH1D2VS08000

Switching System Service
Unit (SFP+)
7.6 EH1D200CMU00-Centralized Monitoring Unit
Version Mapping
EH1D200CMU00 Not supported Supported in V200R001C00

to V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D200CMU00 can be installed in:
l Slots CMU1 and CMU2 in an S9706 chassis.

l Slots CMU1 and CMU2 in an S9712 chassis.
Figure 7-30 Appearance of the EH1D200CMU00
Functions
The EH1D200CMU00 consists of the following modules:
l Device management module: sends interface control signals for device management.

l Backplane interface module: provides management channels for power modules, fan
modules, and communication channels between the active and standby
EH1D200CMU00 cards.
The EH1D200CMU00 manages power modules and fan modules in a chassis. The
EH1D200CMU00 is hot swappable. Two EH1D200CMU00 cards can be installed in a chassis
to work in active/standby mode.
Fan module management
The EH1D200CMU00 provides the following fan module management functions:
l Fan module presence detection
l Fan module registration management
l Fan speed monitoring
l Fan speed control
l Management and report of fan module alarms
l Query of fan module electronic labels
The EH1D200CMU00 supports real-time fan module presence detection. Fan modules in the
chassis register with the EH1D200CMU00. After they register, the EH1D200CMU00 obtains
electronic labels of the fan modules and saves the electronic labels for users to query.
Meanwhile, the EH1D200CMU00 monitors the speed and alarms of the fan modules in real
time.
When detecting an alarm about a fan module, the EH1D200CMU00 reports the alarm to the
MPU. When the alarm is cleared, the EH1D200CMU00 reports alarm clearance to the MPU.
When the EH1D200CMU00 receives a fan speed adjustment instruction from the MPU, it
delivers the instruction to the fan modules. The fan modules then adjust their speed according
to the instruction. If a chassis has no EH1D200CMU00 installed, fans run at full speed.
Power module management
The EH1D200CMU00 provides the following power module management functions:
l Power module presence detection
l Power module shutdown
l Power module registration management
l Voltage and current monitoring
l Management and report of power module alarms
l Query of power module electronic labels
The EH1D200CMU00 supports real-time power module presence detection. Power modules
in the chassis register with the EH1D200CMU00. After they register, the EH1D200CMU00
obtains electronic labels of the power modules and saves the electronic labels for users to
query. Meanwhile, the EH1D200CMU00 queries the current and voltage of power modules in
real time.
When detecting an alarm about a power module, the EH1D200CMU00 reports the alarm to
the MPU. When the alarm is cleared, the EH1D200CMU00 reports alarm clearance to the
MPU.
When the switch is working in deep energy saving mode, the EH1D200CMU00 automatically
shuts down redundant power modules to save power. You can set the deep energy saving
mode using the set power manage mode command.

Figure 7-31 Indicators on the EH1D200CMU00 panel
1
2
Table 7-55 Indicators on the EH1D200CMU00 panel

1 RUN/ALM: Green Slow blinking: The card software is

running status running properly.
indicator Fast blinking: The card software is
unregistered.

intervention.
Slow blinking: The switch is
reporting an alarm. For example, a
CMU, fan module, or power
module on the switch fails.
Fast blinking: The input power is
insufficient or a 1600 W DC power
module is installed.

standby status CMU.
indicator Off: The card is the standby CMU.

Figure 7-32 Ports on the EH1D200CMU00 panel
1 One RS485 port (reserved)

2 One MON port (reserved)
Specifications
Table 7-56 Specifications of the EH1D200CMU00

Item Description



03030NWB Centralized Monitoring Unit EH1D200CMU00

7.7 LE0D0VAMPA00-Value-Added Service Unit
Version Mapping
LE0D0VAMPA00 This module is supported in V200R001C00

to V200R008C00 (except in
V200R007C10).
Introduction
The LE0D0VAMPA00 is a Service Process Unit (SPU) for the S9700. It provides value-added
services such as load balancing, firewall, network address translation (NAT), IP Security
(IPSec), and NetStream. Currently, the LE0D0VAMPA00 is the only SPU available.
An LE0D0VAMPA00 card can be installed in:
l Slots 01 to 03 in an S9703 chassis.

Figure 7-33 Appearance of the LE0D0VAMPA00
Functions
The LE0D0VAMPA00 provides value-added services such as load balancing, NAT, firewall,
IPSec, and NetStream. When the LE0D0VAMPA00 is installed on a switch, packets related to
a value-added service are directed to the LE0D0VAMPA00 for processing.
The LE0D0VAMPA00 is hot swappable.

Figure 7-34 Indicators on the LE0D0VAMPA00 panel

1 2 3
RUN/ALM
CON ETH
Table 7-59 Indicators on the LE0D0VAMPA00 panel

1 ACT Yellow Blinking: The port is transmitting

and receiving data.
2 LINK Green Steady on: A link has been

established on the port.

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

(For example, the card has been
forcibly powered off using the
power off command or is about to
start.)
Figure 7-35 Ports on the LE0D0VAMPA00 panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
CON ETH

1 One console management port (serial port). You can connect the serial
port on your PC to the CON port of an SPU and log in to the SPU to
configure it.
2 One ETH management port (FE electrical port). You can connect your
PC to the ETH port and log in to the SPU using Telnet to configure it.
ETH management port


Connector type RJ45

Full-duplex

management port for onsite configuration. The port must use a 8.4 Console Cable. Table
7-61 describes the attributes of a console management port.

Connector type RJ45

Transmitter (UART)


Specifications
Table 7-62 Specifications of the LE0D0VAMPA00
Item Description


03020RRN Value-added service unit LE0D0VAMPA00
7.8 EH1D2PS00P00-Open Service Platform Unit
Version Mapping
EH1D2PS00P00 This module is supported in V200R002C00

to V200R013C00 (except in
V200R007C10).
Introduction
The EH1D2PS00P00 can be installed in:


Figure 7-36 Appearance of the EH1D2PS00P00
Functions
In addition to processing and forwarding service data, the EH1D2PS00P00 can also provide
certain functions using specific operating system and application software.
The EH1D2PS00P00 supports intrusion prevention system (IPS) software.
The IPS software provides the following security functions:
l Detects attacks based on a signature database. The IPS software can identify attacks that
target vulnerabilities of commonly used applications (such as Adobe PDF Reader and
Microsoft Office) and operating systems (such as Microsoft Windows), and
abnormalities of these applications and operating systems.
l Identifies behaviors that violate RFC standards through application identification,
protocol decoding, and state detection, and prevents applications that may use
vulnerabilities of protocols to initiate attacks from running.
l Detects attacks to HTTPS traffic and takes measures to protect the traffic.
l Automatically updates and upgrades the signature database to defend against
vulnerabilities of applications and operating systems in advance.
l Supports periodic and emergent updating of the signature database and allows users to
add customized signatures.
l Implements highly precise intrusion prevention using the default security policy and
provides the bypass function.
The IPS software also provides comprehensive management functions:
l Fine-grained rights management: The IPS manages user rights based on different user
levels, including monitoring level, configuration level, and management level.
l System management based on the web system, command line interface (CLI), and
simple network management protocol (SNMP).
l Reports on logs and alarms: The IPS uses log analysis software to collect and analyze
logs and alarms accurately, and provides various reports on the logs and alarms. Users
can customize reports.

Table 7-65 Functions of the EH1D2PS00P00 running application software

Operating system VMware
Application software IPS and other application software
CPU Intel Core processor, 2.1 GHz, 4 cores, 6

MB cache
Memory l DDR3-1066/1333 MT/s

l Standard configuration: two 2 GB
memory cards (total capacity of 4 GB)
l Maximum configuration: two 8 GB
memory cards (total capacity of 16 GB)
Built-in flash memory 8 GB
Hard disk l Provides two 2.5-inch 500 GB enterprise

Serial Advanced Technology Attachment
(SATA) hard disks.
l Supports RAID 0 and RAID 1.
l Supports hot swapping.
NOTICE
Huawei-certified hard disks are required.
Reliability of non-Huawei-certified hard disks
cannot be ensured. Huawei is not responsible for
any problems caused by non-Huawei-certified
hard disks and will not fix such problems.
Hard disks provided by Huawei are certified.
Service port Two 10GE ports

NOTE
l The two ports are not on the card panel.
l You can run the interface interface-type
interface-number command to enter the view
of the two service ports. The interface-type
indicates the interface type and the interface-
number indicates the interface number that is
0 or 1.

Management port l One VGA port supports:

– Hot swapping
– Standard DB15 socket
l Two USB ports support:
– Hot swapping
– USB 2.0 High-Speed
– USB Specification Rev.2.0
l One serial port: UART port
l One GE port: 10M/100M/1000M auto-
sensing, RJ45 connector. The port enters
sleeping state when no link is
established.
Energy-saving l Dynamic voltage and frequency scaling

for CPU
l Sleeping of idle ports
l Card power detection
Table 7-66 Functions of the EH1D2PS00P00 for service data processing and forwarding
Basic function Service data processing and forwarding
Distributed forwarding Performs concurrent data forwarding using

a distributed data plane.
Hot swapping The EH1D2PS00P00 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-37 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2PS00P00 panel

1 2 4 5 7
RUN/ALM
0
PWR RST sub card HDD0
STAT 1 HDD1
CONSOLE ETH VGA HDD0 HDD1
3 6

Table 7-67 Indicators and buttons on the EH1D2PS00P00 panel

Button
1 PWR button - Press for 0.5s to power the card on

or off.
Hold down the button for more
than 4s to forcibly power off the
card. This operation is performed
when the card stops responding.
2 RST button - Press this button to reset the

operating system and application
software on the card.
NOTICE
Pressing the RST button causes loss of
some service packets. Do not press this
3 STAT - Off: The card is powered off or is

resetting.
Yellow Steady on: The BIOS is running.
Green Steady on: The operating system

(OS) is running normally.
Red Steady on: A major alarm occurred

and requires manual intervention.
For example, hardware self-check
fails or no OS is available.
4 ACT indicator Yellow Blinking: The port is transmitting

of ETH port and receiving data.
5 LINK indicator Green Steady on: A link has been

of ETH port established on the port.
6 HDD0 and Green Blinking: The hard disk is being

HDD1 hard accessed.
disk indicators

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


Button

start.)
Figure 7-38 Ports on the EH1D2PS00P00 panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0
PWR RST sub card HDD0
STAT 1 HDD1
CONSOLE ETH VGA HDD0 HDD1
3 4 5

this port to implement onsite configuration.
2 One ETH management port (10M/100M/1000M BASE-T auto-sensing).
A configuration terminal or network management workstation can
connect to this port to set up a local or remote configuration environment.
3 Two USB ports. Peripherals such as a USB mouse or keyboard can
connect to USB ports.
4 One VGA port. A monitor can connect to this port.
5 Two hard disk slots.
ETH management port


Connector type RJ45
Working mode 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing

Full-duplex


management port for onsite configuration. The port must use a 8.4 Console Cable. Table
7-69 describes the attributes of a console management port.

Connector type RJ45

Transmitter (UART)

Specifications
Table 7-70 Specifications of the EH1D2PS00P00

Item Description

l Weight: 5.50 kg (12.13 lb)
l Maximum power consumption: 137.5 W


03021PHK Open Service Platform EH1D2PS00P00

(OSP) unit

7.9.1 EH1D2F48TEA0-48-Port 10/100BASE-T Interface Card (EA,

RJ45)
Version Mapping
EH1D2F48TEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2F48TEA0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-39 Appearance of the EH1D2F48TEA0
Functions
Table 7-73 Functions of the EH1D2F48TEA0
Basic function Provides forty-eight FE electrical ports for data transmission and line-
rate switching.

forwarding

Hot swapping The EH1D2F48TEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-40 Indicators on the EH1D2F48TEA0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
Table 7-74 Indicators on the EH1D2F48TEA0 panel

1 LINK/ACT Green Steady on: A link has been

indicator of an established on the port.
upper electrical Blinking: The port is transmitting
port and receiving data.
2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-41 Ports on the EH1D2F48TEA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM

1 Forty-eight 10M/100M BASE-T electrical ports
10M/100M BASE-T electrical ports

Table 7-75 lists the attributes of a 10M/100M BASE-T electrical port.
Table 7-75 10M/100M BASE-T electrical port attributes

Connector type RJ45
Standards compliance IEEE 802.3
Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, Ethernet_SNAP
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-76 Specifications of the EH1D2F48TEA0

Item Description



03030NWP 48-port 10/100BASE-T EH1D2F48TEA0

interface card (EA, RJ45)

7.9.2 EH1D2F48TEC0-48-Port 10/100BASE-T Interface Card (EC,

RJ45)
Version Mapping
EH1D2F48TEC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2F48TEC0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-42 Appearance of the EH1D2F48TEC0
Functions
Table 7-79 Functions of the EH1D2F48TEC0
rate switching.

forwarding
Hot swapping The EH1D2F48TEC0 is hot swappable.

Figure 7-43 Indicators on the EH1D2F48TEC0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
Table 7-80 Indicators on the EH1D2F48TEC0 panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-44 Ports on the EH1D2F48TEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-82 Specifications of the EH1D2F48TEC0
Item Description


03030NWQ 48-port 10/100BASE-T EH1D2F48TEC0

interface card (EC, RJ45)

7.9.3 EH1D2F48TFA0-48-Port 10/100BASE-T Interface Card (FA,

RJ45)
Version Mapping
EH1D2F48TFA0 Supported only in V200R001C00,

V200R002C00, and V200R003C00
Introduction
The EH1D2F48TFA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-45 Appearance of the EH1D2F48TFA0
Functions
Table 7-85 Functions of the EH1D2F48TFA0

rate switching.

forwarding
Hot swapping The EH1D2F48TFA0 is hot swappable.

Figure 7-46 Indicators on the EH1D2F48TFA0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
Table 7-86 Indicators on the EH1D2F48TFA0 panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-47 Ports on the EH1D2F48TFA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-88 Specifications of the EH1D2F48TFA0
Item Description


03030NXF 48-port 10/100BASE-T EH1D2F48TFA0

interface card (FA, RJ45)

7.9.4 EH1D2F48SEA0-48-Port 100BASE-X Interface Card (EA, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2F48SEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2F48SEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-48 Appearance of the EH1D2F48SEA0
Functions
Table 7-91 Functions of the EH1D2F48SEA0

Basic function Provides forty-eight FE optical ports for

data transmission and line-rate switching.

Hot swapping The EH1D2F48SEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-49 Indicators on the EH1D2F48SEA0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13

Table 7-92 Indicators on the EH1D2F48SEA0 panel


of a lower and receiving data.
optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

of a lower established on the port.
optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-50 Ports on the EH1D2F48SEA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Forty-eight 100M BASE-X optical ports
100M BASE-X optical port

Table 7-93 lists the attributes of a 100M BASE-X optical port.
Table 7-93 100M BASE-X optical port attributes
Connector type SFP
Optical port attributes Depend on the SFP optical module used.

For details on the optical modules supported
by the EH1D2F48SEA0 and their attributes,
see 9.4 FE SFP/eSFP Optical Modules.
Standards compliance IEEE 802.3u
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-94 Specifications of the EH1D2F48SEA0
Item Description


03030NWJ 48-port 100BASE-X EH1D2F48SEA0

interface card (EA, SFP)

7.9.5 EH1D2F48SEC0-48-Port 100BASE-X Interface Card (EC, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2F48SEC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2F48SEC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-51 Appearance of the EH1D2F48SEC0
Functions
Table 7-97 Functions of the EH1D2F48SEC0

Basic function Provides forty-eight FE optical ports for


Hot swapping The EH1D2F48SEC0 is hot swappable.

Figure 7-52 Indicators on the EH1D2F48SEC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-98 Indicators on the EH1D2F48SEC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

Figure 7-53 Ports on the EH1D2F48SEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Forty-eight 100M BASE-X optical ports
100M BASE-X optical port
Table 7-99 lists the attributes of a 100M BASE-X optical port.
Table 7-99 100M BASE-X optical port attributes
Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2F48SEC0 and their attributes,
see 9.4 FE SFP/eSFP Optical Modules.
Standards compliance IEEE 802.3u
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-100 Specifications of the EH1D2F48SEC0
Item Description



03030NWK 48-port 100BASE-X EH1D2F48SEC0

interface card (EC, SFP)
7.10.1 EH1D2G24SSA0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(SA, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G24SSA0 Supported only in V200R001C00,

V200R002C00, and V200R003C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G24SSA0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-54 Appearance of the EH1D2G24SSA0

Functions
Table 7-103 Functions of the EH1D2G24SSA0

Basic function Provides twenty-four GE optical ports for


Hot swapping The EH1D2G24SSA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-55 Indicators on the EH1D2G24SSA0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-104 Indicators on the EH1D2G24SSA0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-56 Ports on the EH1D2G24SSA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Twenty-four 100/1000BASE-X optical ports
100/1000BASE-X optical ports

Table 7-105 lists the attributes of a 100/1000BASE-X optical port with an optical module
installed.
Table 7-105 100/1000BASE-X optical port attributes (GE optical module)

Connector type SFP

For details about optical modules supported
by the EH1D2G24SSA0 and their attributes,
see 9.4 FE SFP/eSFP Optical Modules,
9.5 GE eSFP Optical Modules, 9.7 GE-
CWDM eSFP Optical Modules, and 9.8
GE-DWDM eSFP Optical Modules.
Standards compliance IEEE 802.3z

Network protocol IP
Table 7-106 lists the attributes of a 100/1000BASE-X optical port with a copper module
installed.
Table 7-106 Optical port attributes (copper module)

Connector type SFP
Optical port attributes Depend on the SFP copper module used.

For details on the copper modules supported
by the cards and attributes of the copper
modules, see 9.9 GE SFP Copper Modules
(10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s
rates).
Standards compliance IEEE 802.3ab
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-107 Specifications of the EH1D2G24SSA0

Item Description




03030NWV 24-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2G24SSA0

interface card (SA, SFP)
7.10.2 ET1D2G24SEC0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(EC, SFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G24SEC0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G24SEC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-57 Appearance of the ET1D2G24SEC0

Functions
Table 7-110 Functions of the ET1D2G24SEC0



Hot swapping The ET1D2G24SEC0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-58 Indicators on the ET1D2G24SEC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-111 Indicators on the ET1D2G24SEC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-59 Ports on the ET1D2G24SEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM

installed.

Connector type SFP

by the ET1D2G24SEC0 and their attributes,

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-114 Specifications of the ET1D2G24SEC0

Item Description

specifications in. x 16.8 i. x 1.4 in.)


03030SGL 24-port 100/1000BASE-X ET1D2G24SEC0

7.10.3 EH1D2G24SEC0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(EC, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G24SEC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G24SEC0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-60 Appearance of the EH1D2G24SEC0

Functions
Table 7-117 Functions of the EH1D2G24SEC0



Hot swapping The EH1D2G24SEC0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-61 Indicators on the EH1D2G24SEC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-118 Indicators on the EH1D2G24SEC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-62 Ports on the EH1D2G24SEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM

installed.

Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2G24SEC0 and their attributes,

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-121 Specifications of the EH1D2G24SEC0

Item Description




03030NWG 24-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2G24SEC0

7.10.4 EH1D2G24SED0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(ED, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G24SED0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G24SED0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-63 Appearance of the EH1D2G24SED0

Functions
Table 7-124 Functions of the EH1D2G24SED0



Hot swapping The EH1D2G24SED0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-64 Indicators on the EH1D2G24SED0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-125 Indicators on the EH1D2G24SED0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-65 Ports on the EH1D2G24SED0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
installed.
Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2G24SED0 and their
attributes, see 9.4 FE SFP/eSFP Optical
Modules, 9.5 GE eSFP Optical Modules,
9.7 GE-CWDM eSFP Optical Modules,
and 9.8 GE-DWDM eSFP Optical
Modules.

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-128 Specifications of the EH1D2G24SED0

Item Description




03030NWH 24-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2G24SED0

interface card (ED, SFP)
7.10.5 EH1D2S24CSA0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 8-Port

10/100/1000BASE-T Combo Interface Card (SA, SFP/RJ45)
Version Mapping
EH1D2S24CSA0 Supported only in V200R001C00,

V200R002C00, and V200R003C00
Introduction
The EH1D2S24CSA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-66 Appearance of the EH1D2S24CSA0

Functions
Table 7-131 Functions of the EH1D2S24CSA0
Basic function Provides line-rate switching on sixteen GE

optical ports and eight combo ports. The
combo ports can be configured as either
optical ports or electrical ports.
NOTE
A maximum of twenty-four ports, that is, sixteen
GE optical ports and eight combo ports, can
work at the same time on the EH1D2S24CSA0.

Hot swapping The EH1D2S24CSA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-67 Indicators on the EH1D2S24CSA0 panel

1 2 46 7
RUN/ALM
COMBO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
35
Table 7-132 Indicators on the EH1D2S24CSA0 panel

2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

optical port

4 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
6 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-68 Ports on the EH1D2S24CSA0 panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
COMBO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1 Eight combo ports. Each combo port consists of a 10/100/1000BASE-T

port and a 100/1000BASE-X port.
2 Sixteen 100/1000BASE-X optical ports
Combo
A combo port is a dual-purpose port consisting of an Ethernet optical port and an Ethernet
electrical port. The electrical and optical ports of a combo port are multiplexed, and only one
of them can work at a time.

NOTE
A combo port can work in any of the following modes: auto (selects working mode automatically), fiber
(optical port), and copper (electrical port). You can run the combo-port command to configure the
working mode of a combo port. By default, a combo port works in auto mode. In this mode, a combo
port determines the working port in the following way:
l If the combo port only has an Ethernet cable connected, the electrical port of the combo port is the
working port after the combo port goes Up.
l If the combo port has an optical module installed, the optical port of the combo port is the working
port after the combo port goes Up, regardless of whether an Ethernet cable is connected to combo
port.
Table 7-133 lists the attributes of a 10/100/1000BASE-T electrical port.
Table 7-133 10/100/1000BASE-T electrical port attributes
Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Table 7-134 lists the attributes of a 100/1000BASE-X optical port.
Table 7-134 100/1000BASE-X optical port attributes
Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2S24CSA0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
installed.

Table 7-135 Optical port attributes (optical module)

Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2S24CSA0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-137 Specifications of the EH1D2S24CSA0
Item Description


03030NWW 24-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2S24CSA0

and 8-port
10/100/1000BASE-T combo
interface card (SA, SFP/
RJ45)
7.10.6 EH1D2S24CEA0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 8-Port

10/100/1000BASE-T Combo Interface Card(EA, SFP/RJ45, 1588)
Version Mapping
EH1D2S24CEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00

Introduction
The EH1D2S24CEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-69 Appearance of the EH1D2S24CEA0
Functions
Table 7-140 Functions of the EH1D2S24CEA0

Basic function The EH1D2S24CEA0 provides line-rate

switching on sixteen GE optical ports and
eight GE combo ports. The combo ports can
be configured as either optical ports or
electrical ports.
NOTE
A maximum of twenty-four ports, that is, sixteen
GE optical ports and eight combo ports, can
work at the same time on the EH1D2S24CEA0.
Synchronous Ethernet The 100 Mbit/s optical/electrical ports and

GE optical ports of the EH1D2S24CEA0
support the synchronous Ethernet function.
When a combo port works as a GE
electrical port, it does not support the
synchronous Ethernet function.

Hot Swap The EH1D2S24CEA0 is hot swappable.

Usage Constraints
To use the synchronous Ethernet function on the EH1D2S24CEA0, make sure a clock
daughter card is running on the device.
Figure 7-70 Indicators on the EH1D2S24CEA0 panel

1 2 46 7
RUN/ALM
COMBO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
35
Table 7-141 Indicators on the EH1D2S24CEA0 panel

2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

optical port
4 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
6 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-71 Ports on the EH1D2S24CEA0 panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
COMBO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

2 Sixteen 100/1000BASE-X optical ports
Combo ports
NOTE
port.

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Table 7-143 lists the attributes of a 100/1000BASE-X optical port.
Table 7-143 100/1000BASE-X optical port attributes
Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2S24CEA0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
installed.
Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2S24CEA0 and their attributes,

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-146 Specifications of the EH1D2S24CEA0

Item Description




03030NXD 24-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2S24CEA0

and 8-port
10/100/1000BASE-T combo
interface card (EA, SFP/
RJ45, 1588)
7.10.7 ET1D2G24SX5E-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(X5E, SFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G24SX5E Supported only in V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G24SX5E can be installed in:
Figure 7-72 Appearance of the ET1D2G24SX5E
Functions
The ET1D2G24SX5E provides the following functions:

l Communicates with the MPU and works under the control of the MPU.
l Searches for routes and destination addresses of data packets for forwarding.
l Forwards data packets.
Table 7-149 Functions of the ET1D2G24SX5E
Basic functions Provides twenty-four GE optical ports for

data access and line-rate switching.
Forwarding speed 24 Gbit/s

Hot swapping The ET1D2G24SX5E is hot swappable.
Figure 7-73 Indicators on the ET1D2G24SX5E panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-150 Indicators on the ET1D2G24SX5E panel

optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-74 Ports on the ET1D2G24SX5E panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Twenty-four 100/1000BASE-X ports
100/1000BASE-X port
Table 7-151 describes the attributes of a 100/1000BASE-X port with an optical module
installed.

Connector type SFP

For optical modules supported by the
ET1D2G24SX5E and their attributes, see
9.4 FE SFP/eSFP Optical Modules, 9.5
GE eSFP Optical Modules, 9.7 GE-

Network protocol IP
Table 7-152 describes the attributes of a 100/1000BASE-X port with a copper module
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-153 Specifications of the ET1D2G24SX5E

Item Description




Part Number Card Name Card Model
03032YEB 24-port 100/1000BASE-X ET1D2G24SX5E

interface card (X5E, SFP)
7.10.8 ET1D2T36SEA0-36-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T and 12-Port

100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (EA, RJ45/SFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2T36SEA0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2T36SEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-75 Appearance of the ET1D2T36SEA0

Functions
Table 7-156 Functions of the ET1D2T36SEA0

Basic function Provides thirty-six 10M/100M/1000M

Ethernet electrical ports and twelve 100M/
1000M Ethernet optical ports for data
transmission and line-rate switching.

Hot Swap The ET1D2T36SEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-76 Indicators on the ET1D2T36SEA0 panel

24 5 6 7
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-157 Indicators on the ET1D2T36SEA0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

upper electrical
port

6 LINK/ACT Blinking: The port is transmitting

indicator of a and receiving data.
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-77 Ports on the ET1D2T36SEA0 panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
1 Twelve 100/1000BASE-X optical ports

2 Thirty-six 10/100/1000BASE-T electrical ports

installed.

Connector type SFP


by the ET1D2T36SEA0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
installed.
Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
10/100/1000BASE-T electrical ports
Connector type RJ45

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-161 Specifications of the ET1D2T36SEA0

Item Description



03030SGX 36-port 10/100/1000BASE- ET1D2T36SEA0

T and 12-port
100/1000BASE-X interface
card (EA, RJ45/SFP)
7.10.9 EH1D2T36SEA0-36-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T and 12-Port

100/1000BASE-X Interface Card (EA, RJ45/SFP)

Version Mapping
EH1D2T36SEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2T36SEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-78 Appearance of the EH1D2T36SEA0
Functions
Table 7-164 Functions of the EH1D2T36SEA0

Basic function Provides thirty-six 10M/100M/1000M

Ethernet electrical ports and twelve 100M/
1000M Ethernet optical ports for data

Hot Swap The EH1D2T36SEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-79 Indicators on the EH1D2T36SEA0 panel

24 5 6 7
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
13

Table 7-165 Indicators on the EH1D2T36SEA0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

6 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

Figure 7-80 Ports on the EH1D2T36SEA0 panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 Twelve 100/1000BASE-X optical ports

2 Thirty-six 10/100/1000BASE-T electrical ports

installed.

Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2T36SEA0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP


rates).
Network protocol IP


Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-169 Specifications of the EH1D2T36SEA0

Item Description




03030NXE 36-port 10/100/1000BASE- EH1D2T36SEA0

T and 12-port
100/1000BASE-X interface
card (EA, RJ45/SFP)
7.10.10 ET1D2G48TEA0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card

(EA, RJ45)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G48TEA0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48TEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-81 Appearance of the ET1D2G48TEA0

Functions
Table 7-172 Functions of the ET1D2G48TEA0
Basic function Provides forty-eight GE electrical ports for


Hot swapping The ET1D2G48TEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-82 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TEA0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
Table 7-173 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TEA0 panel

2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.


intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-83 Ports on the ET1D2G48TEA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Forty-eight 10/100/1000BASE-T electrical ports


Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-175 Specifications of the ET1D2G48TEA0

Item Description



03030SGN 48-port 10/100/1000BASE- ET1D2G48TEA0

T interface card (EA, RJ45)
7.10.11 EH1D2G24TFA0-24-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface

Card (FA, RJ45)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G24TFA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G24TFA0 can be installed in:


Figure 7-84 Appearance of the EH1D2G24TFA0
Functions
Table 7-178 Functions of the EH1D2G24TFA0

Basic function Provides twenty-four 10M/100M/1000M

Ethernet electrical ports for data
Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) The EEE mode can dynamically adjust
power consumption based on network
traffic volume.

Hot swapping The EH1D2G24TFA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-85 Indicators on the EH1D2G24TFA0 panel

1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Table 7-179 Indicators on the EH1D2G24TFA0 panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-86 Ports on the EH1D2G24TFA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1 Twenty-four 10/100/1000BASE-T electrical ports



Connector type RJ45
Standards compliance IEEE802.3ab and IEEE802.3az
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-181 Specifications of the EH1D2G24TFA0

Item Description



03030NXL 24-port 10/100/1000BASE- EH1D2G24TFA0

T interface card (FA, RJ45)
7.10.12 EH1D2G48TEA0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface

Card (EA, RJ45)

Version Mapping
EH1D2G48TEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48TEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-87 Appearance of the EH1D2G48TEA0
Functions
Table 7-184 Functions of the EH1D2G48TEA0



Hot swapping The EH1D2G48TEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-88 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TEA0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM

Table 7-185 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TEA0 panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-89 Ports on the EH1D2G48TEA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM



Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-187 Specifications of the EH1D2G48TEA0

Item Description



03030NWL 48-port 10/100/1000BASE- EH1D2G48TEA0

T interface card (EA, RJ45)
7.10.13 ET1D2G48TEC0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card

(EC, RJ45)

Version Mapping
ET1D2G48TEC0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48TEC0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-90 Appearance of the ET1D2G48TEC0
Functions
Table 7-190 Functions f the ET1D2G48TEC0



Hot swapping The ET1D2G48TEC0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-91 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TEC0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM

Table 7-191 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TEC0 panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-92 Ports on the ET1D2G48TEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM



Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-193 Specifications of the ET1D2G48TEC0

Item Description



03030SGP 48-port 10/100/1000BASE- ET1D2G48TEC0

T interface card (EC, RJ45)
7.10.14 EH1D2G48TEC0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface

Card (EC, RJ45)

Version Mapping
EH1D2G48TEC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48TEC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-93 Appearance of the EH1D2G48TEC0
Functions
Table 7-196 Functions of the EH1D2G48TEC0



Hot swapping The EH1D2G48TEC0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-94 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TEC0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM

Table 7-197 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TEC0 panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-95 Ports on the EH1D2G48TEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM



Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-199 Specifications of the EH1D2G48TEC0

Item Description



03030NWM 48-port 10/100/1000BASE- EH1D2G48TEC0

T interface card (EC, RJ45)
7.10.15 EH1D2G48TED0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface

Card (ED, RJ45)

Version Mapping
EH1D2G48TED0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48TED0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-96 Appearance of the EH1D2G48TED0
Functions
Table 7-202 Functions of the EH1D2G48TED0



Hot swapping The EH1D2G48TED0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-97 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TED0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM

Table 7-203 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TED0 panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-98 Ports on the EH1D2G48TED0 panel

1
RUN/ALM



Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-205 Specifications of the EH1D2G48TED0

Item Description



03030NWN 48-port 10/100/1000BASE- EH1D2G48TED0

T interface card (ED, RJ45)
7.10.16 EH1D2G48TFA0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface

Card (FA, RJ45)

Version Mapping
EH1D2G48TFA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48TFA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-99 Appearance of the EH1D2G48TFA0
Functions
Table 7-208 Functions of the EH1D2G48TFA0



Hot swapping The EH1D2G48TFA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-100 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TFA0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM

Table 7-209 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TFA0 panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-101 Ports on the EH1D2G48TFA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM



Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-211 Specifications of the EH1D2G48TFA0

Item Description



03030NXH 48-port 10/100/1000BASE- EH1D2G48TFA0

T interface card (FA, RJ45)
7.10.17 ET1D2G48TX1E-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card

(X1E, RJ45)

Version Mapping
ET1D2G48TX1E Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for data switching. This
card is highly integrated and has a large port density.
The can be installed in:
The ET1D2G48TX1E can be installed in:
Figure 7-102 Appearance of the ET1D2G48TX1E
Functions
The ET1D2G48TX1E provides the following functions:
Table 7-214 Functions of the ET1D2G48TX1E

Basic functions Provides forty-eight GE electrical ports for


Hot swapping The ET1D2G48TX1E is hot swappable.

Figure 7-103 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TX1E panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
Table 7-215 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TX1E panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-104 Ports on the ET1D2G48TX1E panel

1
RUN/ALM

1 Forty-eight 10/100/1000BASE-T ports
10/100/1000BASE-T port
Table 7-216 describes the attributes of a 10/100/1000BASE-T port.

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-217 Specifications of the ET1D2G48TX1E

Item Description




03030SGE 48-port 10/100/1000BASE- ET1D2G48TX1E

T interface card (X1E,
RJ45)
7.10.18 EH1D2G48TX1E-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface

Card (X1E, RJ45)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G48TX1E Supported in V200R005C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48TX1E provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for
data switching. This card is highly integrated and has a large port density.
The EH1D2G48TX1E can be installed in:

Figure 7-105 Appearance of the EH1D2G48TX1E
Functions
The EH1D2G48TX1E provides the following functions:

Table 7-220 Functions of the EH1D2G48TX1E



Hot swapping The EH1D2G48TX1E is hot swappable.
Figure 7-106 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TX1E panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
Table 7-221 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TX1E panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-107 Ports on the EH1D2G48TX1E panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Forty-eight 10/100/1000BASE-T ports
10/100/1000BASE-T port

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-223 Specifications of the EH1D2G48TX1E

Item Description


Item Description


03030RPK 48-port 10/100/1000BASE- EH1D2G48TX1E

T interface card (X1E,
RJ45)
7.10.19 EH1D2G48TBC0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface

Card (BC, RJ45)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G48TBC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48TBC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-108 Appearance of the EH1D2G48TBC0

Functions
Table 7-226 Functions of the EH1D2G48TBC0

Basic function Provides forty-eight 10M/100M/1000M

Ethernet electrical ports for data
Capable of handling 50 Gbit/s traffic.

Hot swapping The EH1D2G48TBC0 is hot swappable.
Application
The EH1D2G48TBC0 and EH1D2G48SBC0 of the S9700 have a large buffer capacity. The
1.25 GB buffer capacity on each port achieves 200 ms buffering, which prevents packet loss
caused by traffic bursts on a network. When the network is congested and traffic bursts occur,
the large-buffer cards can effectively buffer traffic on ports. The large buffer capacity,
combined with QoS traffic shaping, ensures even, stable traffic transmission on a congested,
unstable network. These cards prevent packet loss while reducing congestion and traffic
bursts on upstream devices.
The large-buffer cards apply to data center networks and video networks:
l When used on a data center network, these cards ensure fast, stable, and low-latency data
forwarding.
l When used on a video network, these cards can prevent voice/image distortion, delay,
and asynchronous image and voice presence caused by packet loss and transmission
latency, guaranteeing high-quality video conferences.
The following uses a collaborative computing scenario as an example to describe application
of these cards in a data center.
Complicated computing tasks, such as search engine computing, oil exploration computing,
and meteorological computing, must be carried out by multiple servers simultaneously. In this
situation, the servers perform collaborative computing, which results in fast transmission of
data flows on a network and traffic bursts when multiple servers send computing data to one
server at the same time. Traffic bursts cause congestion on network nodes, as shown in Figure
7-109. Packets are dropped on congested network nodes.

Figure 7-109 Traffic bursts caused by collaborative computing in EoR deployment
Router Congestion point
Data flow
Core switch
CSS
Aggregation
switch
Server
As shown in Figure 7-110, all switches from the end of row (EoR) switches to core switches
in a data center are equipped with large-buffer cards. These large-buffer cards prevent packet
loss caused by traffic bursts in the data center.
Figure 7-110 Large-buffer cards deployed in a data center
Router
Large-buffer
Core switch card deployed
CSS
Aggregation
switch
Server
Figure 7-111 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TBC0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM

Table 7-227 Indicators on the EH1D2G48TBC0 panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-112 Ports on the EH1D2G48TBC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM



Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-229 Specifications of the EH1D2G48TBC0

Item Description



03030NXK 48-port 10/100/1000BASE- EH1D2G48TBC0

T interface card (BC, RJ45)
7.10.20 ET1D2G48TX5E-48-port 100/1000BASE-T interface card

(X5E, RJ45)

Version Mapping
ET1D2G48TX5E Supported only in V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48TX5E provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for data
switching. This card is highly integrated and has a large port density.
The ET1D2G48TX5E can be installed in:

Figure 7-113 Appearance of the ET1D2G48TX5E
Functions
The ET1D2G48TX5E provides the following functions:
Table 7-232 Functions of the ET1D2G48TX5E


Hot swapping The ET1D2G48TX5E is hot swappable.

Figure 7-114 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TX5E panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
Table 7-233 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TX5E panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-115 Ports on the ET1D2G48TX5E panel

1
RUN/ALM

1 Forty-eight 100/1000BASE-T ports
100/1000BASE-T port
Table 7-234 describes the attributes of a 100/1000BASE-T port.
Table 7-234 100/1000BASE-T electrical port attributes
Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-235 Specifications of the ET1D2G48TX5E
Item Description


03032WSL 48-port 100/1000BASE-T ET1D2G48TX5E

interface card (X5E, RJ45)

7.10.21 ET1D2G48TX5H-48-port 100/1000BASE-T interface card

(X5H, RJ45)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G48TX5H Supported only in V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48TX5H provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for
The ET1D2G48TX5H can be installed in:

Figure 7-116 Appearance of the ET1D2G48TX5H
Functions
The ET1D2G48TX5H provides the following functions:
Table 7-238 Functions of the ET1D2G48TX5H



Hot swapping The ET1D2G48TX5H is hot swappable.
Figure 7-117 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TX5H panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
Table 7-239 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TX5H panel

2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

Figure 7-118 Ports on the ET1D2G48TX5H panel

1
RUN/ALM
100/1000BASE-T port

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-241 Specifications of the ET1D2G48TX5H

Item Description



03032WSK 48-port 100/1000BASE-T ET1D2G48TX5H

interface card (X5H, RJ45)
7.10.22 ET1D2G48TX5S-48-port 100/1000BASE-T interface card

(X5S, RJ45)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G48TX5S Supported only in V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48TX5S provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for data
The ET1D2G48TX5S can be installed in:

Figure 7-119 Appearance of the ET1D2G48TX5S
Functions
The ET1D2G48TX5S provides the following functions:

Table 7-244 Functions of the ET1D2G48TX5S



Hot swapping The ET1D2G48TX5S is hot swappable.
Figure 7-120 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TX5S panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
Table 7-245 Indicators on the ET1D2G48TX5S panel


2 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-121 Ports on the ET1D2G48TX5S panel

1
RUN/ALM
100/1000BASE-T port

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-247 Specifications of the ET1D2G48TX5S

Item Description


Item Description


03032WSG 48-port 100/1000BASE-T ET1D2G48TX5S

interface card (X5S, RJ45)
7.10.23 ET1D2G48SEA0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(EA, SFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G48SEA0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48SEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-122 Appearance of the ET1D2G48SEA0

Functions
Table 7-250 Functions of the ET1D2G48SEA0

Basic function Provides forty-eight GE optical ports for


Hot swapping The ET1D2G48SEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-123 Indicators on the ET1D2G48SEA0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-251 Indicators on the ET1D2G48SEA0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-124 Ports on the ET1D2G48SEA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Forty-eight 100/1000BASE-X optical ports

installed.

Connector type SFP

by the ET1D2G48SEA0 and its attributes,

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-254 Specifications of the ET1D2G48SEA0

Item Description




03030SGH 48-port 100/1000BASE-X ET1D2G48SEA0

7.10.24 EH1D2G48SEA0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(EA, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G48SEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48SEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-125 Appearance of the EH1D2G48SEA0

Functions
Table 7-257 Functions of the EH1D2G48SEA0



Hot swapping The EH1D2G48SEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-126 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SEA0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-258 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SEA0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-127 Ports on the EH1D2G48SEA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
installed.
Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2G48SEA0 and its attributes,

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-261 Specifications of the EH1D2G48SEA0

Item Description




03030NWD 48-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2G48SEA0

7.10.25 ET1D2G48SEC0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(EC, SFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G48SEC0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48SEC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-128 ET1D2G48SEC0

Functions
Table 7-264 Functions of the ET1D2G48SEC0



Hot swapping The ET1D2G48SEC0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-129 Indicators on the ET1D2G48SEC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-265 Indicators on the ET1D2G48SEC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-130 Ports on the ET1D2G48SEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM

installed.

Connector type SFP

by the ET1D2G48SEC0 and its attributes,

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-268 Specifications of the ET1D2G48SEC0

Item Description



03030SGJ 48-port 100/1000BASE-X ET1D2G48SEC0

7.10.26 EH1D2G48SED0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(ED, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G48SED0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48SED0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-131 Appearance of the EH1D2G48SED0

Functions
Table 7-271 Functions of the EH1D2G48SED0



Hot swapping The EH1D2G48SED0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-132 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SED0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-272 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SED0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-133 Ports on the EH1D2G48SED0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
installed.
Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2G48SED0 and its attributes,

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-275 Specifications of the EH1D2G48SED0

Item Description




03030NWF 48-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2G48SED0

interface card (ED, SFP)
7.10.27 EH1D2G48SFA0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(FA, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G48SFA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48SFA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-134 Appearance of the EH1D2G48SFA0

Functions
Table 7-278 Functions of the EH1D2G48SFA0



Hot swapping The EH1D2G48SFA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-135 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SFA0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-279 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SFA0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-136 Ports on the EH1D2G48SFA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
installed.
Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2G48SFA0 and its attributes,

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-282 Specifications of the EH1D2G48SFA0

Item Description




03030NXG 48-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2G48SFA0

interface card (FA, SFP)
7.10.28 EH1D2G48SBC0-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(BC, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G48SBC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48SBC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-137 Appearance of the EH1D2G48SBC0

Functions
Table 7-285 Functions of the EH1D2G48SBC0

Basic function Provides forty-eight 100M/1000M optical

ports for data transmission and line-rate
switching.
Capable of handling 50 Gbit/s traffic.

Hot swapping The EH1D2G48SBC0 is hot swappable.
Application
The EH1D2G48TBC0 and EH1D2G48SBC0 of the S9700 have a large buffer capacity. The
1.25 GB buffer capacity on each port achieves 200 ms buffering, which prevents packet loss
caused by traffic bursts on a network. When the network is congested and traffic bursts occur,
the large-buffer cards can effectively buffer traffic on ports. The large buffer capacity,
combined with QoS traffic shaping, ensures even, stable traffic transmission on a congested,
unstable network. These cards prevent packet loss while reducing congestion and traffic
bursts on upstream devices.
The large-buffer cards apply to data center networks and video networks:
l When used on a data center network, these cards ensure fast, stable, and low-latency data
forwarding.
l When used on a video network, these cards can prevent voice/image distortion, delay,
and asynchronous image and voice presence caused by packet loss and transmission
latency, guaranteeing high-quality video conferences.
The following uses a collaborative computing scenario as an example to describe application
of these cards in a data center.
Complicated computing tasks, such as search engine computing, oil exploration computing,
and meteorological computing, must be carried out by multiple servers simultaneously. In this
situation, the servers perform collaborative computing, which results in fast transmission of
data flows on a network and traffic bursts when multiple servers send computing data to one
server at the same time. Traffic bursts cause congestion on network nodes, as shown in Figure
7-138. Packets are dropped on congested network nodes.

Figure 7-138 Traffic bursts caused by collaborative computing in EoR deployment
Router Congestion point
Data flow
Core switch
CSS
Aggregation
switch
Server
As shown in Figure 7-139, all switches from the end of row (EoR) switches to core switches
in a data center are equipped with large-buffer cards. These large-buffer cards prevent packet
loss caused by traffic bursts in the data center.
Figure 7-139 Large-buffer cards deployed in a data center
Router
Large-buffer
Core switch card deployed
CSS
Aggregation
switch
Server
Figure 7-140 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SBC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13

Table 7-286 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SBC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-141 Ports on the EH1D2G48SBC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM

installed.

Connector type SFP

by the EH1D2G48SBC0 and their
Modules.
Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-289 Specifications of the EH1D2G48SBC0

Item Description

l Weight: 2.90 kg (6.39 lb) (excluding the optical module)


03030NXJ 48-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2G48SBC0

interface card (BC, SFP)

(X1E, SFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G48SX1E Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48SX1E provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for data


Functions
Basic functions Provides forty-eight GE optical ports for



24 5
RUN/ALM
13



optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1
RUN/ALM
1 Forty-eight 100/1000BASE-X ports
100/1000BASE-X port
installed.


Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP

Specifications

Item Description



03030SGD 48-port 100/1000BASE-X ET1D2G48SX1E

7.10.30 EH1D2G48SX1E-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(X1E, SFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2G48SX1E Supported in V200R005C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2G48SX1E provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for

The EH1D2G48SX1E can be installed in:

Figure 7-145 Appearance of the EH1D2G48SX1E
Functions
The EH1D2G48SX1E provides the following functions:
Table 7-299 Functions of the EH1D2G48SX1E


Hot swapping The EH1D2G48SX1E is hot swappable.
Figure 7-146 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SX1E panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13

Table 7-300 Indicators on the EH1D2G48SX1E panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-147 Ports on the EH1D2G48SX1E panel

1
RUN/ALM
100/1000BASE-X port
installed.


Connector type SFP

EH1D2G48SX1E and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-303 Specifications of the EH1D2G48SX1E

Item Description



03030RPJ 48-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2G48SX1E


(X5E, SFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G48SX5E Supported only in V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48SX5E provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for data


Functions



24 5
RUN/ALM
13



optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1
RUN/ALM
100/1000BASE-X port
installed.


Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP

Specifications

Item Description



03032WSU 48-Port 100/1000BASE-X ET1D2G48SX5E

Interface Card (X5E, SFP)
7.10.32 ET1D2G48SX5H-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(X5H, SFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G48SX5H Supported only in V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48SX5H provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for

The ET1D2G48SX5H can be installed in:

Figure 7-151 Appearance of the ET1D2G48SX5H
Functions
The ET1D2G48SX5H provides the following functions:
Table 7-313 Functions of the ET1D2G48SX5H


Hot swapping The ET1D2G48SX5H is hot swappable.
Figure 7-152 Indicators on the ET1D2G48SX5H panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13

Table 7-314 Indicators on the ET1D2G48SX5H panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-153 Ports on the ET1D2G48SX5H panel

1
RUN/ALM
100/1000BASE-X port
installed.


Connector type SFP

ET1D2G48SX5H and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-317 Specifications of the ET1D2G48SX5H

Item Description



03032WSX 48-Port 100/1000BASE-X ET1D2G48SX5H

Interface Card (X5H, SFP)
7.10.33 ET1D2G48SX5S-48-Port 100/1000BASE-X Interface Card

(X5S, SFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2G48SX5S Supported only in V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2G48SX5S provides high performance, large entry sizes, and a large buffer for data

The ET1D2G48SX5S can be installed in:

Figure 7-154 Appearance of the ET1D2G48SX5S
Functions
The ET1D2G48SX5S provides the following functions:
Table 7-320 Functions of the ET1D2G48SX5S


Hot swapping The ET1D2G48SX5S is hot swappable.
Figure 7-155 Indicators on the ET1D2G48SX5S panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13

Table 7-321 Indicators on the ET1D2G48SX5S panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-156 Ports on the ET1D2G48SX5S panel

1
RUN/ALM
100/1000BASE-X port
installed.


Connector type SFP

ET1D2G48SX5S and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-324 Specifications of the ET1D2G48SX5S
Item Description


03032WSS 48-Port 100/1000BASE-X ET1D2G48SX5S

Interface Card (X5S, SFP)
7.11 GE/10GE Interface Cards
7.11.1 EH1D2T24XEA0-24-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T and 2-Port

10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA, RJ45/XFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2T24XEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00

Introduction
The EH1D2T24XEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-157 Appearance of the EH1D2T24XEA0
Functions
Table 7-327 Functions of the EH1D2T24XEA0

Basic function Provides twenty-four GE electrical ports

and two 10GE optical ports for data

Software feature LAN/WAN switching
Hot swapping The EH1D2T24XEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-158 Indicators on the EH1D2T24XEA0 panel

1 2 3 4 5
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Table 7-328 Indicators on the EH1D2T24XEA0 panel


and receiving data.


4 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-159 Ports on the EH1D2T24XEA0 panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1 Two 10GBASE XFP optical ports

2 Twenty-four 10/100/1000BASE-T electrical ports
10/100/1000BASE-T electrical port


Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
10GBASE XFP optical port

Table 7-330 lists the attributes of a 10GBASE XFP optical port.
Table 7-330 10GBASE XFP optical port attributes

Connector type XFP
Optical port attributes Depend on the XFP optical module used.

For details about the optical modules
supported by the EH1D2T24XEA0 and
their attributes, see 9.13 10GE XFP
Optical Modules, 9.14 10GE-CWDM
XFP Optical Modules, and 9.15 10GE-
DWDM XFP Optical Modules.
Standards compliance IEEE 802.3ae
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-331 Specifications of the EH1D2T24XEA0

Item Description


Item Description


03030NWY 24-port 10/100/1000BASE- EH1D2T24XEA0

T and 2-port 10GBASE-X
interface card (EA, RJ45/
XFP)
7.11.2 EH1D2S24XEA0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 2-Port

10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA, SFP/XFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2S24XEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2S24XEA0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-160 Appearance of the EH1D2S24XEA0

Functions
Table 7-334 Functions of the EH1D2S24XEA0
Basic function Provides twenty-four GE optical ports and

two 10GE optical ports for data

Software feature LAN/WAN interface switching
Hot swapping The EH1D2S24XEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-161 Indicators on the EH1D2S24XEA0 panel

1 2 46 7
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
35
Table 7-335 Indicators on the EH1D2S24XEA0 panel

and receiving data.


optical port
4 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port

6 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-162 Ports on the EH1D2S24XEA0 panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

100/1000BASE-X optical port

installed.

Connector type SFP


supported by the EH1D2S24XEA0 and their
Modules.
Standards compliance IEEE802.3z
Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP


Attribute XFP Description
Connector type XFP


supported by the EH1D2S24XEA0 and their
attributes, see 9.13 10GE XFP Optical
Modules, 9.14 10GE-CWDM XFP
Optical Modules, and 9.15 10GE-DWDM
XFP Optical Modules.
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-339 Specifications of the EH1D2S24XEA0
Item Description


03030NXA 24-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2S24XEA0

and 2-port 10GBASE-X
interface card (EA, SFP/
XFP)

7.11.3 EH1D2S24XEC0-24-Port 100/1000BASE-X and 2-Port

10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC, SFP/XFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2S24XEC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2S24XEC0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-163 Appearance of the EH1D2S24XEC0
Functions
Table 7-342 Functions of the EH1D2S24XEC0
Basic function Provides twenty-four GE optical ports and

two 10GE optical ports for data

Software feature LAN/WAN interface switching
Hot swapping The EH1D2S24XEC0 is hot swappable.

Figure 7-164 Indicators on the EH1D2S24XEC0 panel

1 2 46 7
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
35
Table 7-343 Indicators on the EH1D2S24XEC0 panel


and receiving data.


optical port
4 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
6 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-165 Ports on the EH1D2S24XEC0 panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

100/1000BASE-X optical port
installed.
Connector type SFP

supported by the EH1D2S24XEC0 and their
Modules.
Network protocol IP
installed.


Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP


Connector type XFP

supported by the EH1D2S24XEC0 and their
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-347 Specifications of the EH1D2S24XEC0
Item Description


03030NXN 24-port 100/1000BASE-X EH1D2S24XEC0

and 2-port 10GBASE-X
interface card (EC, SFP/
XFP)
7.11.4 ET1D2S04SX1E-4-Port 10GBASE-X and 24-Port

100/1000BASE-X and 8-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Combo Interface
Card (X1E, RJ45/SFP/SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2S04SX1E Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00

Introduction
The ET1D2S04SX1E can be installed in:
Figure 7-166 Appearance of the ET1D2S04SX1E
Functions
The ET1D2S04SX1E provides the following functions:
Table 7-350 Functions of the

Basic functions Provides four 10G Ethernet optical ports,

sixteen 100/1000M Ethernet optical ports,
and eight 10/100/1000M combo ports for

Software feature LAN/WAN switchover
Hot swapping The ET1D2S04SX1E is hot swappable.
Figure 7-167 Indicators on the ET1D2S04SX1E panel

12 46 7 8 9
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
ACT ACT ACT ACT
LINK LINK LINK LINK
35

Table 7-351 Indicators on the ET1D2S04SX1E panel


of a 10GE and receiving data.
optical port

of a 10GE established on the port.
optical port

of a lower GE and receiving data.
optical port
4 ACT indicator
of an upper GE
optical port

of a lower GE established on the port.
optical port
6 LINK indicator
of an upper GE
optical port

8 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-168 Ports on the ET1D2S04SX1E panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
ACT ACT ACT ACT
LINK LINK LINK LINK
1 Four 10GBASE SFP+ ports

2 Sixteen 100/1000BASE-X ports
10GBASE SFP+ port
Table 7-352 describes the attributes of a 10GBASE SFP+ port.
Table 7-352 Attributes of a 10GBASE SFP+ port
Connector type SFP+
Optical port attributes Depend on the SFP+ - SFP+ high-speed

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
4*SFP+ high-speed cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m),
SFP+ optical module, or SFP+ optical
cable used.
For the optical modules supported by the
ET1D2S04SX1E and their attributes, see
9.10 10GE SFP+ Optical Modules, 9.11
10GE-CWDM SFP+ Optical Modules,
and 9.12 10GE-DWDM SFP+ Optical
Modules.

Network protocol IP
100/1000BASE-X port
installed.

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Combo Port

NOTE
port.
Table 7-355 Attributes of a 10/100/1000BASE-T port

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP
Table 7-356 describes the attributes of a 100/1000BASE-X port.
Table 7-356 Attributes of a 100/1000BASE-X port

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-357 Specifications of the ET1D2S04SX1E

Item Description



03030SGF 4-port 10GBASE-X and 24- ET1D2S04SX1E

port 100/1000BASE-X and
8-port 10/100/1000BASE-T
combo interface card (X1E,
RJ45/SFP/SFP+)
7.11.5 EH1D2S04SX1E-4-Port 10GBASE-X and 24-Port

Version Mapping
EH1D2S04SX1E Supported in V200R005C00 to

V200R013C00

Introduction
The EH1D2S04SX1E can be installed in:
Figure 7-169 Appearance of the EH1D2S04SX1E
Functions
The EH1D2S04SX1E provides the following functions:
Table 7-360 Functions of the EH1D2S04SX1E

Basic functions Provides four 10G Ethernet optical ports,

sixteen 100/1000M Ethernet optical ports,
and eight 10/100/1000M combo ports for

Hot swapping The EH1D2S04SX1E is hot swappable.
Figure 7-170 Indicators on the EH1D2S04SX1E panel

12 46 7 8 9
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
ACT ACT ACT ACT
LINK LINK LINK LINK
35

Table 7-361 Indicators on the EH1D2S04SX1E panel


optical port

optical port

optical port
4 ACT indicator
of an upper GE
optical port

optical port
6 LINK indicator
of an upper GE
optical port

8 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-171 Ports on the EH1D2S04SX1E panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
ACT ACT ACT ACT
LINK LINK LINK LINK
1 Four 10GBASE SFP+ ports

2 Sixteen 100/1000BASE-X ports
10GBASE SFP+ port
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
EH1D2S04SX1E and their attributes, see
10GE-CWDM SFP+ Optical Modules
and9.12 10GE-DWDM SFP+ Optical
Modules.

Network protocol IP
100/1000BASE-X port
installed.

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
installed.

Connector type SFP

rates).
Network protocol IP
Combo Port

NOTE
port.

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-367 Specifications of the EH1D2S04SX1E
Item Description


03030RPL 4-port 10GBASE-X and 24- EH1D2S04SX1E

8-port 10/100/1000BASE-T
RJ45/SFP/SFP+)
7.11.6 ET1D2S04SX5E-4-port 10GE SFP+ and 44-port GE SFP

interface card (X5E, SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2S04SX5E Supported only in V200R013C00

Introduction

Functions
Table 7-370 Functions of the ET1D2S04SX5E
Basic functions Provides four 10GE optical ports and forty-

four GE optical ports for data transmission
and switching.


24 5
RUN/ALM
10G 1G
13



optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1 2
RUN/ALM
10G 1G
1 Four 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports

2 Forty-four 1000BASE-X ports
10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X port

10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports support 10GE and GE auto sensing. Table 7-372
describes the attributes of a port working in 1000M mode, and Table 7-373 describes the
attributes of a port working in 10G mode. Table 7-374 describes the attributes of a 10GBASE
SFP+/1000BASE-X port using a copper module.
Table 7-372 Optical port attributes (GE optical module)

Connector type SFP+

Network protocol IP
Table 7-373 Optical port attributes (10GE optical module, high-speed cable or SFP+ optical
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
9.10 10GE SFP+ Optical Modules
(OSXD22N00 not supported), 9.11 10GE-
CWDM SFP+ Optical Modules, and 9.12
10GE-DWDM SFP+ Optical Modules.
Network protocol IP


Connector type SFP

(100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s rates).
Network protocol IP
1000BASE-X ports
Table 7-375 lists the attributes of a 1000BASE-X port with an optical module installed.

Connector type SFP

by the ET1D2S04SX5E and its attributes,
see 9.5 GE eSFP Optical Modules, 9.7
GE-CWDM eSFP Optical Modules, and
9.8 GE-DWDM eSFP Optical Modules.
Network protocol IP
Table 7-376 lists the attributes of a 1000BASE-X port with a copper module installed.

Connector type SFP


Network protocol IP
Specifications

Item Description



03032YEA 4-port 10GE SFP+ and 44- ET1D2S04SX5E

port GE SFP interface card
(X5E, SFP+)

7.11.7 ET1D2S08SX1E-8-Port 10GBASE-X and 8-Port

Version Mapping
ET1D2S08SX1E Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction

Functions
Basic functions Provides eight 10GBASE-X ports and eight

10/100/1000M combo ports for data access
and line-rate switching.



12 46 7 8 9
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT
LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK
35

optical port

optical port

optical port
4 ACT indicator
of an upper GE
optical port

optical port
6 LINK indicator
of an upper GE
optical port


8 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Eight 10GE BASE-SFP+ ports

10GBASE SFP+ port


Connector type SFP+


cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
10GE-CWDM SFP+ Optical Modules and
9.12 10GE-DWDM SFP+ Optical
Modules.
Standards compliance IEEE802.3ae
Network protocol IP
Combo port
NOTE
port.

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP


Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications

Item Description




03030SGG 8-port 10GBASE-X and 8- ET1D2S08SX1E

8-port 10/100/1000BASE-T
RJ45/SFP/SFP+)
7.11.8 EH1D2S08SX1E-8-Port 10GBASE-X and 8-Port

Version Mapping
EH1D2S08SX1E Supported in V200R005C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2S08SX1E can be installed in:

Figure 7-178 Appearance of the EH1D2S08SX1E
Functions
The EH1D2S08SX1E provides the following functions:

Table 7-388 Functions of the EH1D2S08SX1E

Basic functions Provides eight 10GBASE-X ports and eight

10/100/1000M combo ports for data access
and line-rate switching.

Hot swapping The EH1D2S08SX1E is hot swappable.
Figure 7-179 Indicators on the EH1D2S08SX1E panel

12 46 7 8 9
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
35
Table 7-389 Indicators on the EH1D2S08SX1E panel


optical port

optical port

optical port
4 ACT indicator
of an upper GE
optical port

optical port

6 LINK indicator
of an upper GE
optical port

8 LINK/ACT
indicator of a
lower electrical
port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-180 Ports on the EH1D2S08SX1E panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Eight 10GE BASE-SFP+ ports

10GBASE SFP+ port


Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Modules.
Standards compliance IEEE802.3ae
Network protocol IP
Combo port
NOTE
port.

Connector type RJ45
Network protocol IP


Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-393 Specifications of the EH1D2S08SX1E

Item Description




03030RPM 8-port 10GBASE-X and 8- EH1D2S08SX1E

8-port 10/100/1000BASE-T
RJ45/SFP/SFP+)
7.11.9 ET1D2S24SX2E-24-Port 10GE SFP+ Interface and 8-Port GE

SFP Interface Card (X2E, SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2S24SX2E Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction

Functions

Basic functions Provides twenty-four 10GE optical ports

and eight GE optical ports for data
transmission and switching.


24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Twenty-four 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports

2 Eight 1000BASE-X ports


Connector type SFP+


Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
CWDM SFP+ Optical Modules and 9.12
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP


Network protocol IP
1000BASE-X ports
Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP

Specifications

Item Description



03031YGJ 24-Port 10GE SFP+ ET1D2S24SX2E

Interface and 8-Port GE SFP
Interface Card (X2E, SFP+)
7.11.10 ET1D2S24SX2S-24-Port 10GE SFP+ Interface and 8-Port

GE SFP Interface Card (X2S, SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2S24SX2S Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2S24SX2S can be installed in:


Figure 7-184 Appearance of the ET1D2S24SX2S
Functions
Table 7-406 Functions of the ET1D2S24SX2S
Basic functions Provides twenty-four 10GE optical ports

and eight GE optical ports for data

Hot swapping The ET1D2S24SX2S is hot swappable.
Figure 7-185 Indicators on the ET1D2S24SX2S panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13
Table 7-407 Indicators on the ET1D2S24SX2S panel

optical port

2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-186 Ports on the ET1D2S24SX2S panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Twenty-four 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports

2 Eight 1000BASE-X ports


Connector type SFP+

ET1D2S24SX2S and their attributes, see 9.5
Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
ET1D2S24SX2S and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP


Network protocol IP
1000BASE-X ports
Connector type SFP

by the ET1D2S24SX2S and its attributes,
Network protocol IP
Connector type SFP


Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-413 Specifications of the ET1D2S24SX2S

Item Description



03031YGG 24-Port 10GE SFP+ ET1D2S24SX2S

Interface and 8-Port GE SFP
Interface Card (X2S, SFP+)
7.11.11 ET1D2S16SX2E-16-Port 10GE SFP+ Interface and 16-Port

GE SFP Interface Card (X2E, SFP+)

Version Mapping
ET1D2S16SX2E Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
Functions

Basic functions Provides sixteen 10GE optical ports and

sixteen GE optical ports for data


24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
13



optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 Sixteen 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports

2 Sixteen 1000BASE-X ports


Connector type SFP+

Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Network protocol IP


Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
1000BASE-X ports

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP


Network protocol IP
Specifications

Item Description



03031YGL 16-Port 10GE SFP+ ET1D2S16SX2E

Interface and 16-Port GE
SFP Interface Card (X2E,
SFP+)

7.11.12 ET1D2S16SX2S-16-Port 10GE SFP+ Interface and 16-Port

GE SFP Interface Card (X2S, SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2S16SX2S Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2S16SX2S can be installed in:
Figure 7-190 Appearance of the ET1D2S16SX2S
Functions
Table 7-426 Functions of the ET1D2S16SX2S

Basic functions Provides sixteen 10GE optical ports and

sixteen GE optical ports for data

Hot swapping The ET1D2S16SX2S is hot swappable.

Figure 7-191 Indicators on the ET1D2S16SX2S panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
13
Table 7-427 Indicators on the ET1D2S16SX2S panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

Figure 7-192 Ports on the ET1D2S16SX2S panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

2 Sixteen 1000BASE-X ports


Connector type SFP+

ET1D2S16SX2S and their attributes, see 9.5
Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+


cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
ET1D2S16SX2S and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
1000BASE-X ports

Connector type SFP


by the ET1D2S16SX2S and its attributes,
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-433 Specifications of the ET1D2S16SX2S

Item Description


Item Description


03031YGK 16-Port 10GE SFP+ ET1D2S16SX2S

Interface and 16-Port GE
SFP Interface Card (X2S,
SFP+)
7.12.1 EH1D2X02XEA0-2-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA,

XFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2X02XEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X02XEA0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-193 Appearance of the EH1D2X02XEA0
Functions
Table 7-436 Functions of the EH1D2X02XEA0

Basic function Provides two 10GE optical ports for data


Hot swapping The EH1D2X02XEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-194 Indicators on the EH1D2X02XEA0 panel

1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT
Table 7-437 Indicators on the EH1D2X02XEA0 panel


and receiving data.



indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-195 Ports on the EH1D2X02XEA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT
Connector type XFP

supported by the EH1D2X02XEA0 and

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-439 Specifications of the EH1D2X02XEA0

Item Description



03030NWT 2-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X02XEA0

interface card (EA, XFP)
7.12.2 EH1D2X02XEC0-2-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC,

XFP)

Version Mapping
EH1D2X02XEC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X02XEC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-196 Appearance of the EH1D2X02XEC0
Functions
Table 7-442 Functions of the EH1D2X02XEC0



Hot swapping The EH1D2X02XEC0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-197 Indicators on the EH1D2X02XEC0 panel

1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT

Table 7-443 Indicators on the EH1D2X02XEC0 panel

and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-198 Ports on the EH1D2X02XEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT
Connector type XFP


supported by the EH1D2X02XEC0 and
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-445 Specifications of the EH1D2X02XEC0

Item Description



03030NWU 2-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X02XEC0

interface card (EC, XFP)


XFP)
Version Mapping

V200R013C00
Introduction

Functions




1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1
RUN/ALM
0 1
LINK LINK
ACT ACT


Connector type XFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications

Item Description



03030RCU 2-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X02XEC1

interface card (EC, XFP),
FCC
7.12.4 ET1D2X04XEA0-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA,

XFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X04XEA0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X04XEA0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-202 Appearance of the ET1D2X04XEA0
Functions
Table 7-454 Functions of the ET1D2X04XEA0
Basic function Provides four 10GE optical ports for data



Hot swapping The ET1D2X04XEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-203 Indicators on the ET1D2X04XEA0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT
Table 7-455 Indicators on the ET1D2X04XEA0 panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-204 Ports on the ET1D2X04XEA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT

1 Four 10GBASE XFP optical ports


Connector type XFP

supported by the ET1D2X04XEA0 and
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-457 Specifications of the ET1D2X04XEA0

Item Description



Table 7-458 Order information
03030SGR 4-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X04XEA0

7.12.5 EH1D2X04XEA0-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EA,

XFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2X04XEA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X04XEA0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-205 Appearance of the EH1D2X04XEA0
Functions
Table 7-460 Functions of the EH1D2X04XEA0



Hot swapping The EH1D2X04XEA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-206 Indicators on the EH1D2X04XEA0 panel

1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT
Table 7-461 Indicators on the EH1D2X04XEA0 panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-207 Ports on the EH1D2X04XEA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT



Connector type XFP

supported by the EH1D2X04XEA0 and
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-463 Specifications of the EH1D2X04XEA0

Item Description




03030NWR 4-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X04XEA0

7.12.6 ET1D2X04XEC1-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC,

XFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X04XEC1 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X04XEC1 can be installed in:
Figure 7-208 Appearance of the ET1D2X04XEC1
Functions
Table 7-466 Functions of the ET1D2X04XEC1




Hot swapping The ET1D2X04XEC1 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-209 Indicators on the ET1D2X04XEC1 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT
Table 7-467 Indicators on the ET1D2X04XEC1 panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-210 Ports on the ET1D2X04XEC1 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT



Connector type XFP

supported by the ET1D2X04XEC1 and their
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-469 Specifications of the ET1D2X04XEC1

Item Description




03030SGS 4-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X04XEC1


XFP)
Version Mapping

V200R013C00
Introduction

Functions





1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT



Connector type XFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications

Item Description




03030NWS 4-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X04XEC0

7.12.8 ET1D2X08SX5E-8-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X5E,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X08SX5E Supported only in V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X08SX5E can be installed in:
Figure 7-214 Appearance of the ET1D2X08SX5E
Functions
The ET1D2X08SX5E provides the following functions:

Table 7-478 Functions of the ET1D2X08SX5E

Basic functions Provides eight 1000M/10G BASE-X ports

for data access and switching.

Hot swapping The ET1D2X08SX5E is hot swappable.
Figure 7-215 Indicators on the ET1D2X08SX5E panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-479 Indicators on the ET1D2X08SX5E panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.


intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-216 Ports on the ET1D2X08SX5E panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Eight 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports

10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports support 10GE and GE auto sensing.

Connector type SFP+

For the SFP optical modules supported by
the ET1D2X08SX5E and their attributes,
Network protocol IP

cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
ET1D2X08SX5E and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-483 Specifications of the ET1D2X08SX5E
Item Description


03032WTF 8-Port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X08SX5E

Interface Card (X5E, SFP+)
7.12.9 ET1D2X08SX5H-8-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X5H,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X08SX5H Supported only in V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X08SX5H can be installed in:


Figure 7-217 Appearance of the ET1D2X08SX5H
Functions
The ET1D2X08SX5H provides the following functions:
Table 7-486 Functions of the ET1D2X08SX5H

Basic functions Provides eight 1000M/10G BASE-X ports

for data access and switching.

Hot swapping The ET1D2X08SX5H is hot swappable.
Figure 7-218 Indicators on the ET1D2X08SX5H panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13

Table 7-487 Indicators on the ET1D2X08SX5H panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-219 Ports on the ET1D2X08SX5H panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Eight 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports


Connector type SFP+

the ET1D2X08SX5H and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
ET1D2X08SX5H and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP


Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-491 Specifications of the ET1D2X08SX5H

Item Description



03032WTH 8-Port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X08SX5H

Interface Card (X5H, SFP+)

XFP)

Version Mapping

V200R013C00
Introduction
Functions




1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT
Connector type XFP


Network protocol IP
Specifications

Item Description



03030RCW 4-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X04XEC1

interface card (EC, XFP),
FCC

7.12.11 EH1D2X04XED0-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (ED,

XFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2X04XED0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X04XED0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-223 Appearance of the EH1D2X04XED0
Functions
Table 7-500 Functions of the EH1D2X04XED0


Hot swapping The EH1D2X04XED0 is hot swappable.

Figure 7-224 Indicators on the EH1D2X04XED0 panel

1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT
Table 7-501 Indicators on the EH1D2X04XED0 panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-225 Ports on the EH1D2X04XED0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3
LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT


Connector type XFP

supported by the EH1D2X04XED0 and
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-503 Specifications of the EH1D2X04XED0

Item Description




03030NXC 4-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X04XED0

interface card (ED, XFP)
7.12.12 EH1D2X08SED4-8-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (ED,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2X08SED4 Supported in V200R002C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X08SED4 can be installed in:
Figure 7-226 Appearance of the EH1D2X08SED4

Functions
Table 7-506 Functions of the EH1D2X08SED4
Basic function Provides eight 10GE BASE-X optical ports

for data transmission and line-rate
switching.

Software feature Service port clustering
Hot swapping The EH1D2X08SED4 is hot swappable.
Usage Constraints
When service ports on an EH1D2X08SED4 card need to be used to set up a CSS, the card can
only be installed in the S9712 or S9706 chassis and must use 10G optical modules or 10G
cables.
Figure 7-227 Indicators on the EH1D2X08SED4 panel

1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Table 7-507 Indicators on the EH1D2X08SED4 panel

of an optical and receiving data.
port

of an optical established on the port.
port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-228 Ports on the EH1D2X08SED4 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Eight 10GBASE SFP+ optical ports
10GBASE SFP+ optical port

Table 7-508 lists the attributes of a 10GE BASE-SFP+ optical port.
Table 7-508 Optical port attributes

Connector type SFP+


cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
EH1D2X08SED4, see 9.10 10GE SFP+
Optical Modules, 9.11 10GE-CWDM SFP
+ Optical Modules and 9.12 10GE-
DWDM SFP+ Optical Modules.
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-509 Specifications of the EH1D2X08SED4

Item Description



03021TJE 8-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X08SED4

interface card (ED, SFP+)

7.12.13 EH1D2X08SED5-8-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (ED,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2X08SED5 Supported in V200R002C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X08SED5 can be installed in:

Figure 7-229 Appearance of the EH1D2X08SED5
Functions
Table 7-512 Functions of the EH1D2X08SED5
Basic function Provides eight 10GE BASE-X optical ports

for data transmission and line-rate
switching.


Hot swapping The EH1D2X08SED5 is hot swappable.
Usage Constraints
When service ports on an EH1D2X08SED5 card need to be used to set up a CSS, the card can
cables.
Figure 7-230 Indicators on the EH1D2X08SED5 panel

1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Table 7-513 Indicators on the EH1D2X08SED5 panel

port

port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-231 Ports on the EH1D2X08SED5 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Eight 10GBASE SFP+ optical ports

Table 7-514 lists the attributes of a 10GE BASE-SFP+ optical port.
Table 7-514 Optical port attributes

Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
EH1D2X08SED5, see 9.10 10GE SFP+
Optical Modules, 9.11 10GE-CWDM SFP
+ Optical Modules and 9.12 10GE-
DWDM SFP+ Optical Modules.
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-515 Specifications of the EH1D2X08SED5

Item Description



03021TJF 8-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X08SED5

interface card (ED, SFP+)
7.12.14 ET1D2X12SSA0-12-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SA,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X12SSA0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X12SSA0 can be installed in:


Figure 7-232 Appearance of the ET1D2X12SSA0
Functions
Table 7-518 Functions of the ET1D2X12SSA0
Basic function Provides twelve 10GE optical ports for data


Hot swapping The ET1D2X12SSA0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-233 Indicators on the ET1D2X12SSA0 panel

12 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT
Table 7-519 Indicators on the ET1D2X12SSA0 panel

port


port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-234 Ports on the ET1D2X12SSA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Twelve 10GBASE SFP+ optical ports

Table 7-520 lists the attributes of a 10GBASE SFP+ optical port.
Table 7-520 10GBASE SFP+ optical port attributes

Connector type SFP+


cable (1 m or 10 m), SFP+ optical module,
or SFP+ optical cable used.
ET1D2X12SSA0 and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-521 Specifications of the ET1D2X12SSA0
Item Description


03030SGY 12-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X12SSA0

interface card (SA, SFP+)

7.12.15 EH1D2X12SSA0-12-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SA,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2X12SSA0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X12SSA0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-235 Appearance of the EH1D2X12SSA0
Functions
Table 7-524 Functions of the EH1D2X12SSA0

Basic function Provides twelve 10GE optical ports for data


Software feature Service port clustering and LAN/WAN

switchover
Hot swapping The EH1D2X12SSA0 is hot swappable.

Usage Constraints
When service ports on an EH1D2X12SSA0 card need to be used to set up a CSS, the card can
only be installed in the S9712 or S9706 chassis.
An EH1D2X12SSA0 card supports line-rate forwarding in any of the following conditions:
l The card is installed in any LPU slot of an S9703. Whether this card can support line-
rate forwarding in this condition also depends on the model of LPUs installed in other
slots.
l The card is installed in any LPU slot of an S9706 switch configured with two main
control units (SRUD).
l The card is installed in slot 6 or 7 of an S9712 switch configured with two main control
units (SRUD), and the fabric mode of this slot is set to the extended mode.
Figure 7-236 Indicators on the EH1D2X12SSA0 panel

1 2 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Table 7-525 Indicators on the EH1D2X12SSA0 panel


port

port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-237 Ports on the EH1D2X12SSA0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Twelve 10GBASE SFP+ optical ports

Table 7-526 lists the attributes of a 10GBASE SFP+ optical port.
Table 7-526 10GBASE SFP+ optical port attributes

Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m or 10 m), SFP+ optical module,
or SFP+ optical cable used.
EH1D2X12SSA0 and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-527 Specifications of the EH1D2X12SSA0

Item Description



03030NWX 12-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X12SSA0

interface card (SA, SFP+)
7.12.16 ET1D2X16SSC0-16-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SC,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X16SSC0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X16SSC0 can be installed in:


Figure 7-238 Appearance of the ET1D2X16SSC0
Functions
Table 7-530 Functions of the ET1D2X16SSC0
Basic function Provides sixteen 10GE BASE-X optical

ports for data transmission and switching.

Hot swapping The ET1D2X16SSC0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-239 Indicators on the ET1D2X16SSC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-531 Indicators on the ET1D2X16SSC0 panel

optical port

2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-240 Ports on the ET1D2X16SSC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Sixteen 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X optical ports
10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X optical port

10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X optical ports support 10GE and GE auto sensing.


Connector type SFP+

ET1D2X16SSC0 and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Modules.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP


(1000 Mbit/s rates).
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-535 Specifications of the ET1D2X16SSC0

Item Description



03030SHB 16-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X16SSC0

interface card (SC, SFP+)
7.12.17 EH1D2X16SFC0-16-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (FC,

SFP+)

Version Mapping
EH1D2X16SFC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X16SFC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-241 Appearance of the EH1D2X16SFC0
Functions
Table 7-538 Functions of the EH1D2X16SFC0

Basic function Provides sixteen 10GE BASE-X optical

ports for data transmission and switching.

Hot swapping The EH1D2X16SFC0 is hot swappable.

Usage Constraints
When service ports on an EH1D2X16SFC0 card need to be used to set up a CSS, the card can
cables.
Figure 7-242 Indicators on the EH1D2X16SFC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-539 Indicators on the EH1D2X16SFC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.


intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-243 Ports on the EH1D2X16SFC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Sixteen 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X optical ports

10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X optical ports support 10GE and GE auto sensing.

Connector type SFP+

EH1D2X16SFC0 and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP

cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Modules.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-543 Specifications of the EH1D2X16SFC0

Item Description



03030NXP 16-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X16SFC0

interface card (FC, SFP+)

SFP+)
Version Mapping

V200R013C00
Introduction


Functions
Basic function Provides sixteen 10GE optical ports for data


Hot swapping The ET1D2X16SSC2 is hot swappable.

24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
13

optical port

2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15



Connector type SFP+

Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Modules.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP


Network protocol IP
Specifications

Item Description



03031HGN 16-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X16SSC2

7.12.19 EH1D2X16SSC2-16-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SC,

SFP+)

Version Mapping
EH1D2X16SSC2 Supported in V200R008C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X16SSC2 can be installed in:
Figure 7-247 Appearance of the EH1D2X16SSC2
Functions
Table 7-554 Functions of the EH1D2X16SSC2

Basic function Provides sixteen 10GE optical ports for data


Hot swapping The EH1D2X16SSC2 is hot swappable.
Usage Constraints
If service ports on the EH1D2X16SSC2 need to be used to set up a CSS, the card can only be
installed in the S9712 or S9706 chassis and must use 10G optical modules and 10G cables.

Figure 7-248 Indicators on the EH1D2X16SSC2 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
13
Table 7-555 Indicators on the EH1D2X16SSC2 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

Figure 7-249 Ports on the EH1D2X16SSC2 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


Connector type SFP+

EH1D2X16SSC2 and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+


cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Modules.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-559 Specifications of the EH1D2X16SSC2

Item Description


Item Description


03031HGP 16-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X16SSC2


SFP+)
Version Mapping

V200R013C00
Introduction

Functions

Basic functions Provides thirty-two 10GE optical ports for

data transmission and switching.


24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
13


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Thirty-two 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports
Connector type SFP+


Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Modules.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP

Specifications

Item Description



03031FSM 32-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X32SSC0

7.12.21 EH1D2X32SSC0-32-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (SC,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2X32SSC0 Supported in V200R008C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X32SSC0 can be installed in:


Figure 7-253 Appearance of the EH1D2X32SSC0
Functions
Table 7-570 Functions of the EH1D2X32SSC0



Usage Constraints
If service ports on the EH1D2X32SSC0 need to be used to set up a CSS, the card can only be
installed in the S9712 or S9706 chassis and must use 10G optical modules and 10G cables.
Figure 7-254 Indicators on the EH1D2X32SSC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
13

Table 7-571 Indicators on the EH1D2X32SSC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-255 Ports on the EH1D2X32SSC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31


Connector type SFP+

Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Modules.
Network protocol IP
Connector type SFP


Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-575 Specifications of the EH1D2X32SSC0

Item Description



03031FSP 32-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X32SSC0

7.12.22 ET1D2X32SX2E-32-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X2E,

SFP+)

Version Mapping
ET1D2X32SX2E Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X32SX2E can be installed in:
Figure 7-256 Appearance of the ET1D2X32SX2E
Functions
Table 7-578 Functions of the ET1D2X32SX2E



Figure 7-257 Indicators on the ET1D2X32SX2E panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
13

Table 7-579 Indicators on the ET1D2X32SX2E panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-258 Ports on the ET1D2X32SX2E panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31


Connector type SFP+

Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-583 Specifications of the ET1D2X32SX2E
Item Description


03031WHS 32-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X32SX2E

interface card (X2E, SFP+)

7.12.23 ET1D2X32SX2S-32-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X2S,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X32SX2S Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X32SX2S can be installed in:
Figure 7-259 Appearance of the ET1D2X32SX2S
Functions
Table 7-586 Functions of the ET1D2X32SX2S



Figure 7-260 Indicators on the ET1D2X32SX2S panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
13

Table 7-587 Indicators on the ET1D2X32SX2S panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-261 Ports on the ET1D2X32SX2S panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31


Connector type SFP+

ET1D2X32SX2S and their attributes, see
Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-591 Specifications of the ET1D2X32SX2S
Item Description


03031YGE 32-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X32SX2S

interface card (X2S, SFP+)

7.12.24 ET1D2X32SX2H-32-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X2H,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X32SX2H Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X32SX2H can be installed in:
Figure 7-262 Appearance of the ET1D2X32SX2H
Functions
Table 7-594 Functions of the ET1D2X32SX2H



Figure 7-263 Indicators on the ET1D2X32SX2H panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
13

Table 7-595 Indicators on the ET1D2X32SX2H panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-264 Ports on the ET1D2X32SX2H panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31


Connector type SFP+

Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-599 Specifications of the ET1D2X32SX2H
Item Description


03032AUQ 32-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X32SX2H

interface card (X2H, SFP+)

7.12.25 EH1D2X40SFC0-40-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (FC,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2X40SFC0 Supported in V200R001C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
This EH1D2X40SFC0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-265 Appearance of the EH1D2X40SFC0
Functions
Table 7-602 Functions of the EH1D2X40SFC0

Basic function Provides forty 1000M/10GE BASE-X

optical ports for data transmission and
switching.

Hot swapping The EH1D2X40SFC0 is hot swappable.

Usage Constraints
When service ports on an EH1D2X40SFC0 card need to be used to set up a CSS, the card can
cables.
Figure 7-266 Indicators on the EH1D2X40SFC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-603 Indicators on the EH1D2X40SFC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.


intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-267 Ports on the EH1D2X40SFC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Forty 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X optical ports
NOTE
l When a lot of cables are connected to a card, the cable management frame for this slot may not have
sufficient space. In this case, deploy cables in three layers that do not cross over each other, and then
put the three layers through the cable management frame. See Figure 7-268.
l It is not recommended to connect copper cables and optical fibers to the same card because copper
cables may block the routes of optical fibers. If copper cables and optical fibers are used on the same
card, connect the optical fibers to ports near the left side of the card and the copper cables to ports
near the right side, as shown in Figure 7-269.
Figure 7-268 Three layers of cables in a cable management frame

Figure 7-269 Arrangement of optical fibers and SFP+ cables

10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X optical ports support 10GE and GE auto sensing. Table 7-604
lists the attributes of a 1000M BASE-X optical port, and Table 7-605 lists the attributes of a
10GE BASE-SFP+ optical port. Table 7-606 lists the attributes of a 10GBASE SFP+/
1000BASE-X optical port with a copper module installed.

Connector type SFP+

Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+


cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Modules.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-607 Specifications of the EH1D2X40SFC0

Item Description


Item Description


03030NXM 40-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X40SFC0

interface card (FC, SFP+)
7.12.26 ET1D2X48SEC0-48-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X48SEC0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X48SEC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-270 Appearance of the ET1D2X48SEC0

Functions
The ET1D2X48SEC0 provides the following functions:
Table 7-610 Functions of the ET1D2X48SEC0

Basic functions Provides forty-eight 1000M/10G BASE-X

ports for data access and switching.

Hot swapping The ET1D2X48SEC0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-271 Indicators on the ET1D2X48SEC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-611 Indicators on the ET1D2X48SEC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-272 Ports on the ET1D2X48SEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
1 Forty-eight 10GBASE SFP+/1000BASE-X ports
NOTE

Figure 7-274 Optical fibers and SFP+ cables on the same card


Connector type SFP+

the ET1D2X48SEC0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
ET1D2X48SEC0 and their attributes, see
Modules.

Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-615 Specifications of the ET1D2X48SEC0

Item Description



03030SGC 48-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X48SEC0

interface card (EC, SFP+)
7.12.27 EH1D2X48SEC0-48-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (EC,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2X48SEC0 Supported in V200R005C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2X48SEC0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-275 Appearance of the EH1D2X48SEC0
Functions
The EH1D2X48SEC0 provides the following functions:

Table 7-618 Functions of the EH1D2X48SEC0



Hot swapping The EH1D2X48SEC0 is hot swappable.
Figure 7-276 Indicators on the EH1D2X48SEC0 panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-619 Indicators on the EH1D2X48SEC0 panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.


intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-277 Ports on the EH1D2X48SEC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
NOTE



Connector type SFP+

the EH1D2X48SEC0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
EH1D2X48SEC0 and their attributes, see
Modules.
Network protocol IP


Connector type SFP

Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-623 Specifications of the EH1D2X48SEC0

Item Description



03030RPH 48-port 10GBASE-X EH1D2X48SEC0

interface card (EC, SFP+)

7.12.28 ET1D2X48SX2S-48-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (X2S,

SFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2X48SX2S Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2X48SX2S can be installed in:
Figure 7-280 Appearance of the ET1D2X48SX2S
Functions
The ET1D2X48SX2S provides the following functions:
Table 7-626 Functions of the ET1D2X48SX2S



Hot swapping The ET1D2X48SX2S is hot swappable.

Figure 7-281 Indicators on the ET1D2X48SX2S panel

24 5
RUN/ALM
13
Table 7-627 Indicators on the ET1D2X48SX2S panel


optical port
2 ACT indicator
of an upper
optical port

optical port
4 LINK indicator
of an upper
optical port

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

Figure 7-282 Ports on the ET1D2X48SX2S panel

1
RUN/ALM
NOTE
Connector type SFP+


the ET1D2X48SX2S and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
cable)
Connector type SFP+

cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m), QSFP+ -
cable used.
Network protocol IP

Connector type SFP


Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-631 Specifications of the ET1D2X48SX2S
Item Description


03031WJA 48-port 10GBASE-X ET1D2X48SX2S

interface card (X2S, SFP+)
7.13.1 ET1D2L02QSC0-2-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (SC,

QSFP+)

Version Mapping
ET1D2L02QSC0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2L02QSC0 can be installed in:

Figure 7-285 Appearance of the ET1D2L02QSC0
Functions
Table 7-634 Functions of the ET1D2L02QSC0
Basic function l Provides two 40GE optical ports for data

l Allows a 40GE port to split into four
10GE ports.

Hot swapping The ET1D2L02QSC0 is hot swappable.
Application
A 40GE network can be established by installing 40GE cards on aggregation switches and
core switches, as shown in Figure 7-286.

Figure 7-286 40GE cards deployed on a campus network
Branch
Visitor Branch
Eth-trunk
Router
CSS
40GE line
Firewall
Data center
Core switch
DMZ
Aggregation
switch
AP
Access switch
A 40GE network with 40GE cards deployed has the following advantages:
l Provides higher bandwidth.
l Is compatible with 10GE networks because a 40GE interface can be split into four 10GE
interfaces. This feature enables customers to seamlessly upgrade their 10GE networks to
40GE networks.
l Has a higher efficiency and lower packet loss ratio than a 40GE network established by
bundling four 10GE lines for load balancing.
The 40GE cards are used on networks that need to provide high bandwidth, for example,
video surveillance bearer networks and high-definition (HD) video conference bearer
networks. The following uses an HD video conference bearer network as an example to
describe application of 40GE cards.
Transmission of HD video and voice flows consumes high bandwidth on a network,
especially on the aggregation layer and core layer. The bandwidth of aggregation and core
devices usually becomes a bottleneck on an HD video conference bearer network. As shown
in Figure 7-286, 40GE cards are deployed on the aggregation layer and core layer to transmit
HD video and voice flows faster, more efficiently, with fewer packets lost. This deployment
ensures sufficient bandwidth for the HD video conference bearer network and delivers high
quality HD images and voice.

Figure 7-287 Indicators on the ET1D2L02QSC0 panel

1 3
RUN/ALM
TX 0 RX TX 1 RX
0 1
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
Table 7-635 Indicators on the ET1D2L02QSC0 panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-288 Ports on the ET1D2L02QSC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
TX 0 RX TX 1 RX
0 1
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
1 Two 40GE BASE-X optical ports

40GE BASE-X optical port

Table 7-636 lists the attributes of a 40GE BASE-X optical port.
Table 7-636 40GE BASE-X optical port attributes

Connector type QSFP+
Optical port attributes Depend on the QSFP+ optical module,

QSFP+ - QSFP+ high-speed cable (1 m, 3
m, 5 m), QSFP+ - 4*SFP+ high-speed
cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m) or QSFP+ AOC
cable used.
For details on optical modules supported by
the ET1D2L02QSC0 and their attributes,
see 9.16 40GE QSFP+ Optical Modules.
Standards compliance IEEE802.3ba
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-637 Specifications of the ET1D2L02QSC0

Item Description




03030SHE 2-port 40GBASE-X ET1D2L02QSC0

interface card (SC, QSFP+)
7.13.2 EH1D2L02QFC0-2-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (FC,

QSFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2L02QFC0 Supported in V200R002C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2L02QFC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-289 Appearance of the EH1D2L02QFC0

Functions
Table 7-640 Functions of the EH1D2L02QFC0

Basic function l Provides two 40GE optical ports for data

10GE ports.

Hot swapping The EH1D2L02QFC0 is hot swappable.
Application
core switches (S9700), as shown in Figure 7-290.

Branch
Visitor Branch
Eth-trunk
Router
CSS
40GE line
Firewall
Data center
Core switch
DMZ
Aggregation
switch
AP
Access switch
40GE networks.

Usage Constraints
When service ports on an EH1D2L02QFC0 card need to be used to set up a CSS, the card can
only be installed in the S9712 or S9706 chassis.
The EH1D2L02QFC0 can forward packets at line speed in any LPU slot on the S9703, S9706
and S9712.
Figure 7-291 Indicators on the EH1D2L02QFC0 panel

1 3
RUN/ALM
TX 0 RX TX 1 RX
0 1
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
Table 7-641 Indicators on the EH1D2L02QFC0 panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

Figure 7-292 Ports on the EH1D2L02QFC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
TX 0 RX TX 1 RX
0 1
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
1 Two 40GE BASE-X optical ports

cable used.
the EH1D2L02QFC0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-643 Specifications of the EH1D2L02QFC0
Item Description


Item Description


03021RNK 2-port 40GBASE-X EH1D2L02QFC0

interface card (FC, QSFP+)
7.13.3 ET1D2L08QSC0-8-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (SC,

QSFP+)
Version Mapping
ET1D2L08QSC0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2L08QSC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-293 Appearance of the ET1D2L08QSC0

Functions
Table 7-646 Functions of the ET1D2L08QSC0

Basic function l Provides eight 40GE optical ports for

data transmission and line-rate
switching.
10GE ports.

Hot swapping The ET1D2L08QSC0 is hot swappable.
Application

Branch
Visitor Branch
Eth-trunk
Router
CSS
40GE line
Firewall
Data center
Core switch
DMZ
Aggregation
switch
AP
Access switch
40GE networks.

Figure 7-295 Indicators on the ET1D2L08QSC0 panel

1 3
RUN/ALM
0 1 2 3 TX 0 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 5 RX TX 6 RX TX 7 RX 4 5 6 7
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
Table 7-647 Indicators on the ET1D2L08QSC0


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-296 Ports on the ET1D2L08QSC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
1 Eight 40GE BASE-X optical ports

NOTE
When multiple QSFP+ cables are connected to an ET1D2L08QSC0 card, divide all the cables on the
card into two bundles. Route the two bundles in two layers through the cable management frame to
ensure that the bend radius of the cables is in the allowed range.

Optical port attribute Depend on the QSFP+ optical module,

cable used.
the ET1D2L08QSC0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-649 Specifications of the ET1D2L08QSC0

Item Description




03030SHF 8-port 40GBASE-X ET1D2L08QSC0

interface card (SC, QSFP+)
7.13.4 EH1D2L08QFC0-8-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (FC,

QSFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2L08QFC0 Supported in V200R002C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2L08QFC0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-297 Appearance of the EH1D2L08QFC0

Functions
Table 7-652 Functions of the EH1D2L08QFC0

Basic function l Provides eight 40GE optical ports for

10GE ports.

Hot swapping The EH1D2L08QFC0 is hot swappable.
Application

Branch
Visitor Branch
Eth-trunk
Router
CSS
40GE line
Firewall
Data center
Core switch
DMZ
Aggregation
switch
AP
Access switch
40GE networks.

Usage Constraints
When service ports on an EH1D2L08QFC0 card need to be used to set up a CSS, the card can
only be installed on the S9712 or S9706 chassis.
The EH1D2L08QFC0 can forward packets at line speed in any LPU slot on the S9703 or
S9706. When an EH1D2L08QFC0 card is installed in slot 6 or slot 7 of an S9712 chassis, you
can run the set fabric-mode turbo command to enable line-rate forwarding on this card.
Figure 7-299 Indicators on the EH1D2L08QFC0 panel

1 3
RUN/ALM
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
Table 7-653 Indicators on the EH1D2L08QFC0


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-300 Ports on the EH1D2L08QFC0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
1 Eight 40GE BASE-X optical ports
NOTE
When multiple QSFP+ cables are connected to an EH1D2L08QFC0 card, divide all the cables on the
Optical port attribute Depend on the QSFP+ optical module,

cable used.
the EH1D2L08QFC0 and their attributes,
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-655 Specifications of the EH1D2L08QFC0

Item Description



03021PHM 8-port 40GBASE-X EH1D2L08QFC0

interface card (FC, QSFP+)
7.13.5 EH1D2L08QX2E-8-Port 40GBASE-X Interface Card (X2E,

QSFP+)
Version Mapping
EH1D2L08QX2E Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2L08QX2E can be installed in:


Figure 7-301 Appearance of the EH1D2L08QX2E
Functions
Table 7-658 Functions of the EH1D2L08QX2E

Basic function l Provides eight 40GE Ethernet optical

10GE ports.

Application

Branch
Visitor Branch
Eth-trunk
Router
CSS
40GE line
Firewall
Data center
Core switch
DMZ
Aggregation
switch
AP
Access switch
40GE networks.

Figure 7-303 Indicators on the EH1D2L08QX2E panel

1 3
RUN/ALM
TX 0 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 5 RX TX 6 RX TX 7 RX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
Table 7-659 Indicators on the EH1D2L08QX2E panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-304 Ports on the EH1D2L08QX2E panel

1
RUN/ALM
TX 0 RX TX 1 RX TX 2 RX TX 3 RX TX 4 RX TX 5 RX TX 6 RX TX 7 RX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
1 Eight 40GBASE-X ports to transmit and receive service data

NOTE
When multiple QSFP+ cables are connected to an EH1D2L08QX2E card, divide all the cables on the
40GBASE-X port
Table 7-660 lists attributes of a 40GBASE-X port.
Table 7-660 40GBASE-X port attributes

Optical attributes Depend on the QSFP+ optical module,

cable used.
EH1D2L08QX2E and their attributes, see
9.16 40GE QSFP+ Optical Modules.
Network protocol IP
Specifications
Table 7-661 Specifications of the EH1D2L08QX2E

Item Description




03031WAS 8-port 40GBASE-X EH1D2L08QX2E

interface card (X2E, QSFP
+)
7.14 40GE/100GE Interface Cards
7.14.1 ET1D2H02QX2S-2-Port 100GE QSFP28 Interface and 2-Port

40GE QSFP+ Interface Card (X2S, QSFP28)
Version Mapping
ET1D2H02QX2S Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2H02QX2S can be installed in:
Figure 7-305 Appearance of the ET1D2H02QX2S

Functions
Table 7-664 Functions of the ET1D2H02QX2S

Basic functions Provides two 40GE optical ports and two

100GE optical ports for data transmission
and switching.

Figure 7-306 Indicators on the ET1D2H02QX2S panel

1 3
RUN/ALM
TX 0 RX TX 1 RX TX 0 RX TX 1 RX
ACT0 ACT1 ACT0 ACT1
LINK0 LINK1 LINK0 LINK1

100G 40G
Table 7-665 Indicators on the ET1D2H02QX2S panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-307 Ports on the ET1D2H02QX2S panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
ACT0 ACT1 ACT0 ACT1

100G 40G
1 Two 100GE optical ports to transmit and receive service traffic at 40

Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s
2 Two 40GE BASE-X optical ports to transmit and receive service traffic at
40 Gbit/s
100GE optical port

Table 7-666 lists the attributes of a 100GE optical port.
Table 7-666 Attributes of a 100GE optical port

Connector type QSFP28
Optical port attributes Depend on the QSFP28 - QSFP28 high-

speed cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m), QSFP+ -
QSFP+ high-speed cable (1 m, 3 m, 5 m),
9.16 40GE QSFP+ Optical Modules, 9.19
100GE QSFP28 Optical Modules or
QSFP+ or QSFP28 AOC cable used.

Applicable cable QSFP+ optical module and LC optical fiber

QSFP+ optical module and MPO optical
fiber (MPO-MPO or MPO-4*DLC optical
fiber)
QSFP+ high-speed copper cable
QSFP+ AOC cable
QSFP28 optical module and LC optical
fiber
QSFP28 optical module and MPO optical
fiber (MPO-MPO)
QSFP28 high-speed copper cable
QSFP28 AOC cable



cable used.
the ET1D2H02QX2S and their attributes,
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-668 Specifications of the ET1D2H02QX2S
Item Description


l Storage temperature: -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
03031YGC 2-Port 100GE QSFP28 ET1D2H02QX2S

Interface and 2-Port 40GE
QSFP+ Interface Card (X2S,
QSFP28)
7.14.2 ET1D2H02QX2E-2-Port 100GE QSFP28 Interface and 2-Port

40GE QSFP+ Interface Card (X2E, QSFP28)
Version Mapping
ET1D2H02QX2E Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00

Introduction
The ET1D2H02QX2E can be installed in:
Figure 7-308 Appearance of the ET1D2H02QX2E
Functions
Table 7-671 Functions of the ET1D2H02QX2E

Basic functions Provides two 40GE optical ports and two

100GE optical ports for data transmission
and switching.

Hot swapping The ET1D2H02QX2E is hot swappable.
Figure 7-309 Indicators on the ET1D2H02QX2E panel

1 3
RUN/ALM
ACT0 ACT1 ACT0 ACT1

100G 40G

Table 7-672 Indicators on the ET1D2H02QX2E panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-310 Ports on the ET1D2H02QX2E panel

1 2
RUN/ALM
ACT0 ACT1 ACT0 ACT1

100G 40G
1 Two 100GE optical ports to transmit and receive service traffic at 40

2 Two 40GE BASE-X optical ports to transmit and receive service traffic at
40 Gbit/s
100GE optical port




fiber)
QSFP+ AOC cable
fiber
fiber (MPO-MPO)
QSFP28 AOC cable

cable used.
the ET1D2H02QX2E and their attributes,
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-675 Specifications of the ET1D2H02QX2E

Item Description



03031YGD 2-Port 100GE QSFP28 ET1D2H02QX2E

Interface and 2-Port 40GE
QSFP+ Interface Card
(X2E, QSFP28)
7.15.1 ET1D2C02FEE0-2-Port 100GBASE-X Interface Card (EE,

CFP)
Version Mapping
ET1D2C02FEE0 Supported only in V200R012C00 and

V200R013C00

Introduction
The ET1D2C02FEE0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-311 Appearance of the ET1D2C02FEE0
Functions
Table 7-678 Functions of the ET1D2C02FEE0

Basic functions Provides two 100GE optical ports for data


Figure 7-312 Indicators on the ET1D2C02FEE0 panel

12 3 4
RUN/ALM
0 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
100G 40G 10G 100G 40G 10G
PORT0 CAUTION: CFP SURFACE MAY BE HOT PORT1

Table 7-679 Indicators on the ET1D2C02FEE0 panel

1 When a 100GE Green Steady on: A link has been

port is not split, established on the 100GE port.
this indicator Blinking: The 100GE port is
shows the transmitting and receiving data.
status of the
100GE port.
2 When a 100GE Green When indicator 0 turns on, it shows

port is split the status of the first 40GE port
into two 40GE derived from the 100GE port.
ports, When indicator 1 turns on, it shows
indicators 0 the status of the second 40GE port.
and 1 show the Steady on: A link has been
status of the established on the 40GE port.
40GE ports.
Blinking: The 40GE port is
transmitting and receiving data.

into ten 10GE derived from the 100GE port.
ports, Similarly, the other indicators turn
indicators 0 to on in sequence to show status of
9 show the the rest of 10GE ports.
status of the Steady on: A link has been
10GE ports. established on the 10GE port.

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)

Figure 7-313 Ports on the ET1D2C02FEE0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
100G 40G 10G 100G 40G 10G
1 Two 100GE optical ports
100GE optical port
Connector type CFP
Optical port attributes Depend on the 9.17 40GE CFP Optical

Modules and 9.18 100GE CFP Optical
Modules used
Applicable cable CFP optical module and LC optical fiber

CFP optical module and MPO optical fiber
(MPO-MPO, MPO-2*MPO, or
MPO-10*DLC optical fiber)
Specifications
Table 7-681 Specifications of the ET1D2C02FEE0
Item Description




03030WVE 2-port 100GBASE-X ET1D2C02FEE0

interface card (EE, CFP)
7.15.2 EH1D2C02FEE0-2-Port 100GBASE-X Interface Card (EE,

CFP)
Version Mapping
EH1D2C02FEE0 Supported in V200R008C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The EH1D2C02FEE0 can be installed in:
Figure 7-314 Appearance of the EH1D2C02FEE0

Functions
Table 7-684 Functions of the EH1D2C02FEE0

Basic functions Provides two 100GE optical ports for data


Figure 7-315 Indicators on the EH1D2C02FEE0 panel

12 3 4
RUN/ALM
0 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
100G 40G 10G 100G 40G 10G
Table 7-685 Indicators on the EH1D2C02FEE0 panel

1 When a 100GE Green Steady on: A link has been

port is not split, established on the 100GE port.
this indicator Blinking: The 100GE port is
shows the transmitting and receiving data.
status of the
100GE port.

into two 40GE derived from the 100GE port.
ports, When indicator 1 turns on, it shows
indicators 0 the status of the second 40GE port.
and 1 show the Steady on: A link has been
status of the established on the 40GE port.
40GE ports.


into ten 10GE derived from the 100GE port.
ports, Similarly, the other indicators turn
indicators 0 to on in sequence to show status of
9 show the the rest of 10GE ports.
status of the Steady on: A link has been
10GE ports. established on the 10GE port.

indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-316 Ports on the EH1D2C02FEE0 panel

1
RUN/ALM
0 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
100G 40G 10G 100G 40G 10G
1 Two 100GE optical ports
100GE optical port



Connector type CFP
Optical port attributes Depend on the 9.17 40GE CFP Optical

Modules and 9.18 100GE CFP Optical
Modules used
Applicable cable CFP optical module and LC optical fiber

CFP optical module and MPO optical fiber
(MPO-MPO, MPO-2*MPO, or
MPO-10*DLC optical fiber)
Specifications
Table 7-687 Specifications of the EH1D2C02FEE0

Item Description



03030RYF 2-port 100GBASE-X EH1D2C02FEE0

interface card (EE, CFP)

7.15.3 ET1D2C04HX2E-4-Port 100GE QSFP28 Interface Card (X2E,

QSFP28)
Version Mapping
ET1D2C04HX2E Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2C04HX2E can be installed in:
Figure 7-317 Appearance of the ET1D2C04HX2E
Functions
Table 7-690 Functions of the ET1D2C04HX2E

Basic functions Provides four 100GE optical ports for data



Figure 7-318 Indicators on the ET1D2C04HX2E panel

1 3
RUN/ALM
ACT0 ACT1 ACT2 ACT3
Table 7-691 Indicators on the ET1D2C04HX2E panel

and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-319 Ports on the ET1D2C04HX2E panel

1
RUN/ALM
ACT0 ACT1 ACT2 ACT3

1 Four 100GE optical ports to transmit and receive service traffic at 40

100GE optical port




fiber)
QSFP+ AOC cable
fiber
fiber (MPO-MPO)
QSFP28 AOC cable
Specifications
Table 7-693 Specifications of the ET1D2C04HX2E

Item Description


Item Description


03031YET 4-Port 100GE QSFP28 ET1D2C04HX2E

Interface Card (X2E,
QSFP28)
7.15.4 ET1D2C04HX2S-4-Port 100GE QSFP28 Interface Card (X2S,

QSFP28)
Version Mapping
ET1D2C04HX2S Supported in V200R010C00 to

V200R013C00
Introduction
The ET1D2C04HX2S can be installed in:
Figure 7-320 Appearance of the ET1D2C04HX2S

Functions
Table 7-696 Functions of the ET1D2C04HX2S

Basic functions Provides four 100GE optical ports for data


Figure 7-321 Indicators on the ET1D2C04HX2S panel

1 3
RUN/ALM
ACT0 ACT1 ACT2 ACT3
Table 7-697 Indicators on the ET1D2C04HX2S panel


and receiving data.


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.


start.)
Figure 7-322 Ports on the ET1D2C04HX2S panel

1
RUN/ALM
ACT0 ACT1 ACT2 ACT3
1 Four 100GE optical ports to transmit and receive service traffic at 40

100GE optical port





fiber)
QSFP+ AOC cable
fiber
fiber (MPO-MPO)
QSFP28 AOC cable
Specifications
Table 7-699 Specifications of the ET1D2C04HX2S

Item Description



03031WHR 4-Port 100GE QSFP28 ET1D2C04HX2S

Interface Card (X2S,
QSFP28)

7.16 POS Interface Card
7.16.1 EH1D2WM00000 - WAN Interface Service Process Card
Version Mapping
EH1D2WM00000 Supported only in V200R001C00,

V200R002C00, and V200R003C00
Introduction
The EH1D2WM00000 can be installed in any LPU slot on the S9712, S9706, or S9703
chassis.
The EH1D2WM00000 has two subcard slots and allows different types of subcards to be
installed in the slots at the same time. Table 7-702 lists the subcards for EH1D2WM00000
and the number and type of ports provided by each subcard.
Table 7-702 Subcard list

Subcard Name Ports
P1UF One OC-48c POS-SFP port
P4HF Four OC-12c POS-SFP ports
P4CF Four OC-3c POS-SFP ports
Figure 7-323 Appearance of the EH1D2WM00000

Functions
Table 7-703 Functions of the EH1D2WM00000

Basic function Provides 10 Gbit/s line-rate forwarding and

switching and supports the following
subcards:
l P1UF: provides one 2.5GE POS port.
l P4HF: provides four 622M POS ports.
l P4CF: provides four 155M POS ports.
Any two types of the subcards can be used
together.

Queue Eight queues on each port
Traffic scheduling PQ+WFQ (PQ in queues 5, 6, and 7, and

WFQ in the other queues)
Software feature WAN features
Hot swapping The EH1D2WM00000 is hot swappable.
Usage Constraints
l When using the EH1D2WM00000, install an LE0D00CKMA00 daughter card on the

MPU. If the S9700 uses two MPUs, both MPUs must have an LE0D00CKMA00 daughter
card installed.
l When using an EH1D2WM00000 card, insert one or two subcards on the card; otherwise,
the EH1D2WM00000 card cannot work.
l The EH1D2WM00000 does not support hot swap of subcards.
Indicators and Slots
Figure 7-324 Indicators on the EH1D2WM00000 panel

1
RUN/ALM

Table 7-704 Indicator on the EH1D2WM00000


indicator running.
running properly.
starting.

intervention.

start.)
Figure 7-325 Slots on the EH1D2WM00000 panel
1. Two subcard slots. Subcards can be installed in the slots to provide POS optical ports.

Specifications
Table 7-705 Specifications of the EH1D2WM00000
Item Description

l Weight: 3.80 kg (8.38 lb) (with a fireproof panel and two P1UF
subcards)
l Maximum power consumption:
Two P1UF subcards: 84 W
Two P4HF subcards: 91 W
Two P4CF subcards: 86 W

Card Description Card Model
WAN interface service processing card EH1D2WM00000
7.16.2 P1UF-1-Port OC-48c/STM-16c POS-SFP Flexible Card
Version Mapping
P1UF Supported only in V200R001C00,

V200R002C00, and V200R003C00

Introduction
The P1UF is an optional subcard that can be installed in a subcard slot on the
EH1D2WM00000.
You can choose to install this subcard based on service requirements. This subcard improves
service flexibility and facilitates service expansion.
Figure 7-326 Appearance of P1UF
Functions
Table 7-708 Functions of the P1UF

Basic function Provides a 2.5 Gbit/s optical port and can be

used on the aggregation layer of an MPLS
backbone network.
Protocol and service PPP and HDLC
Port type SFP
Reliability and availability Hot swapping

Figure 7-327 Indicators on the P1UF panel
FPIC-4×OC 48-POS
TUS
STA
0 1
2
CT
K/A
LIN
Table 7-709 Indicators on the P1UF panel

1 STATUS Green Slow blinking: The card software is

running properly.
Fast blinking: The system is in the
alarm state.

Blinking: The port is transmitting
and receiving data.
Off: No link is established on the
port.

Figure 7-328 Ports on the P1UF panel
FPIC-4×OC 48-POS
TUS
STA
0
CT
K/A
LIN
1. One OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP optical port (2.5 Gbit/s)
OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP optical port

Table 7-710 lists the attributes of an OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP optical port.
Table 7-710 OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP optical port attributes

Connector type SFP

by the P1UF and their attributes, see 9.6
POS eSFP Optical Modules.
Duplex mode Full-duplex
Frame format PPP and HDLC
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-711 Specifications of the P1UF
Item Description
Network Enhanced command-line management interface

management SNMP and MIB
Physical l Dimensions (W x D x H): 145 mm x 185 mm x 20 mm (5.7 in. x

specifications 7.3 in. x 0.8 in.)
l Typical power consumption: 12 W
l Heat dissipation: 49 BTU/hour

1-port OC-48c/STM-16c POS-SFP flexible P1UF

card
7.16.3 P4HF-4-Port OC-12c/STM-4c POS-SFP Flexible Card
Version Mapping
P4HF Supported only in V200R001C00,

V200R002C00, and V200R003C00

Introduction
The P4HF is an optional subcard that can be installed in a subcard slot on the
EH1D2WM00000.
Figure 7-329 Appearance of P4HF
Functions
Table 7-714 Functions of the P4HF

Basic function Provides 622 Mbit/s optical ports and can be

backbone network.
Port type SFP
Reliability and availability Hot swappable

Figure 7-330 Indicators on the P4HF panel
FPIC-4×OC 12-POS
TUS
STA
0 1
2
L/A
1
L/A
2
L/A
3
L/A
Table 7-715 Indicators on the P4HF panel


running properly.
alarm state.

and receiving data.
Off: The link is disconnected.

Figure 7-331 Ports on the P4HF panel
FPIC-4×OC 12-POS
TUS
STA
0
L/A
1
1 L/A
2
L/A
3
L/A
1. Four OC-12c/STM-4c POS-SFP FPIC optical ports (622 Mbit/s)
OC-12c/STM-4c POS-SFP FPIC optical port

Table 7-716 lists the attributes of an OC-12c/STM-4c POS-SFP FPIC optical port.
Table 7-716 Attributes of an OC-12c/STM-4c POS-SFP FPIC optical port

Connector type SFP

by the P4HF and their attributes, see 9.6
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-717 Specifications of the P4HF
Item Description



4-port OC-12c/STM-4c POS-SFP flexible P4HF

card
7.16.4 P4CF-4-Port OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP Flexible Card
Version Mapping
P4CF Supported only in V200R001C00,

V200R002C00, and V200R003C00

Introduction
The P4CF is an optional subcard that can be installed in a subcard slot on the
EH1D2WM00000.
Figure 7-332 Appearance of P4CF
Functions
Table 7-720 Functions of the P4CF

Basic function Provides 155 Mbit/s optical ports and can be

backbone network.
Port type SFP
Reliability and availability Hot swapping

Figure 7-333 Indicators on the P4CF panel
FPIC-4×OC3-POS
TUS
STA
0 1
2
L/A
1
L/A
2
L/A
3
L/A
Table 7-721 Indicators on the P4CF panel


running properly.
alarm state.

and receiving data.
Off: No link is established on the
port.

Figure 7-334 Ports on the P4CF panel
FPIC-4×OC3-POS
TUS
STA
0
L/A
1
1 L/A
L/A2
3
L/A
1. Four OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP optical ports (155 Mbit/s)
OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP optical ports

Table 7-722 lists the attributes of an OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP optical port.
Table 7-722 OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP optical port attributes

Connector type SFP

by the P4CF and their attributes, see 9.6
Network protocol IP

Specifications
Table 7-723 Specifications of the P4CF

Item Description




4-port OC-3c/STM-1c POS-SFP flexible P4CF

card
7.17 User Manuals For ACU2, NGFW Module, and IPS

Module (S9700)
The S9700 supports service cards, including ACU2, Intrusion Protection System (IPS)
module, and Next-Generation Firewall (NGFW) module.
Each service card connects to a switch through two internal 20GE Ethernet links.
Services need to be configured on both the switch and service card; otherwise, the service
card cannot work normally.
For the commands and configuration procedures used on the switch, see the Command
Reference and Configuration Guide of switch products. Unless otherwise specified, the
commands and configuration procedures used on the Ethernet ports of switches and service
cards are identical.

For the commands and configuration procedures used on the service card, see the user
manuals of the service card.
Table 7-725 lists the minimum software versions of the ACU2, NGFW module, and IPS
module matching the S9700. The minimum switch version matching the ACU2, NGFW
module, and IPS module is V200R005C00.
Table 7-725 Minimum version of the ACU2, NGFW module, and IPS module matching the
S9700
Service Card Minimum Version
ACU2 V200R005C00
NGFW module V100R001C10
IPS module V100R001C10
ACU2
The Access Controller Unit (ACU2) is supported by the S9700. An ACU2 is a card installed
on a switch, and can be used as an independent wireless access controller (AC).
For the hardware description and service configuration of the ACU2, see ACU2 Product
Documentation of the related version.
l For hardware information about the ACU2, see Installation - Hardware Installation and
Maintenance Guide - Access Controllers - Hardware Installation and Maintenance
Guide (ACU2).
l For the traffic import configuration and service configuration of the ACU2, see
Configuration - CLI-based Configuration - ACU2 Configuration Guide. In "ACU2
Configuration Guide", read "Configuring Communication Between ACU2 and a Switch"
and "Example for Configuring WLAN Services on a Small-Scale Network (ACU2)."
NGFW Module
The NGFW module is available for the S9700. After an NGFW module is installed on a
switch, the switch provides the firewall, NAT, and VPN functions.
The NGFW module models include ET1D2FW00S00, ET1D2FW00S01, and

ET1D2FW00S02.
For details about the NGFW module, see the NGFW Module Product Documentation of
the required version.
l For hardware information about the NGFW module, see Hardware Guide (NGFW
Module).
l For initial deployment (such as login and traffic import) of the NGFW module on the
switch, see Deployment Guide (NGFW Module).
l For service configuration of the NGFW module, see Administrator Guide.
l For typical configuration examples of the NGFW module, see Typical NGFW Module
Configuration.

IPS Module
The IPS module available for the S9700 provides the intrusion defense function. After an IPS
module is installed on a switch, the switch provides the intrusion defense, antivirus, and anti-
DDoS functions.
The IPS module model is ET1D2IPS0S00.
For details about the IPS module, see IPS Module Product Documentation of the required
version.
l For hardware information about the IPS module, see Hardware Guide.
l For initial deployment (such as login and traffic import) of the IPS module on the switch,
see Deployment Guide.
l For service configuration of the IPS module, see Administrator Guide.

Hardware Description 8 Cables
8 Cables
About This Chapter
8.1 DC Power Cable

8.2 AC Power Cable
8.3 Ground Cable
8.4 Console Cable
8.5 Clock Cable
8.6 Ethernet Cable
8.7 High-Speed Cable
8.8 Optical Fiber
8.1 DC Power Cable
Connectors and power capacity of a power cable must match the device on which the cable is
used. Therefore, a device must use the power cables delivered with it.
Types of DC Power Cables

DC power cables of fixed lengths (integer number of meters) are delivered with switches. Cut
the DC power cables into appropriate lengths based on actual situations in your site.
DC power cables include -48 V power cables and RTN ground cables. The lengths and
terminal types of DC power cables used between power distribution boxes and power
distribution frames are determined by the site survey results. DC power cables with OT
terminals are connected to power modules, as shown in Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 DC power cable with an OT terminal
1 2
1. Cord end terminal 2. OT terminal
Connection
The cord end terminal is connected to a power distribution box or power distribution frame,
whereas the OT terminal can be connected to terminals on a 2200 W DC power module.
8.2 AC Power Cable
Connectors and power capacity of a power cable must match the device on which the cable is
used. Therefore, a device must use the power cables delivered with it.
NOTE
If country-specific power cables are required, ensure that the power cables used on a device comply with
standards of the destination country or region. This document uses the China-specific power cables as an
example.
Types of AC Power Cables

Select AC power cables based on the power supply system in your equipment room. The
lengths and terminal types of AC power cables used between power distribution boxes and
power distribution frames are determined by the site survey results. Standard and country-
specific AC power cables can be directly connected to power modules.
l Standard power cables: used to transmit power from a PDU. Figure 8-2 shows the
structure of a C14 straight male to C13 straight female AC power cable, and Figure 8-3
shows the structure of a C20 straight male to C19 straight female AC power cable.
l Country-specific power cables: used to transmit power from a country-specific power
strip. The cables are delivered in compliance with standards of the destination country or
region. For example, PI straight male to C13 straight female AC power cables (Figure
8-4) and PI angle male to C19 straight female AC power cables (Figure 8-5) are used in
China.
l The AC power cables connected to a power distribution box must have cord end
terminals. Figure 8-6 shows the structure of a cord end to C13 straight female AC power

cable. Figure 8-7 shows the structure of a cord end to C19 straight female AC power
cable.
Figure 8-2 Structure of a C14 straight male to C13 straight female AC power cable
C14 straighe male C13 straight female
Figure 8-3 Structure of a C20 straight male to C19 straight female AC power cable
Figure 8-4 Structure of a PI straight male to C13 straight female AC power cable (used in
China)
E PI angle male C13straight female
L N
X1
X2
Figure 8-5 Structure of a PI angle male to C19 straight female AC power cable (used in
China)

Figure 8-6 Structure of a Cord end to C13 straight female AC power cable (used in China)
Cord end terminal C13straight female
Blue
X1
Yellow/Green
X2
Brown
X3
X4
Figure 8-7 Structure of a Cord end to C19 straight female AC power cable (used in China)
Cord end terminal C19straight female
Blue
X1
Yellow/Green
X2
Brown
X3
X4
Connection
Table 8-1 shows connections of various AC power cables.
Table 8-1 Connections of AC power cables
Power Cable Type Connector Type and Connection
C14 straight male to C13 C14 straight male C13 straight female
straight female AC power connector: connected to a connector: connected to the
cable PDU power socket of an 800 W
AC power module.
PI straight male to C13 PI straight male connector:
straight female AC power connected to a country- The current rating of the
cable (used in China) specific power strip power cable is 10 A.
Cord end to C13 straight Cord end terminal:

female AC power cable connected to a power
(used in China) distribution box or power
distribution frame.
Connect the brown wire to
the L terminal, blue wire to
the N terminal, and the
yellow/green wire to the
ground terminal. Different
AC power cables may be
delivered in compliance
with local regulations or
customer requirements.
C20 straight male to C19 C20 straight male C19 straight female
straight female AC power connector: connected to a connector: connected to the
cable PDU power socket of a 2200 W

Power Cable Type Connector Type and Connection
PI angle male to C19 PI angle male connector: AC or a 3000 W AC power

straight female AC power connected to a country- module.
cable (used in China) specific power strip The current rating of the
power cable is 16 A.
Cord end to C19 straight Cord end terminal:
female AC power cable connected to a power When the 3000 W AC
(used in China) distribution box or power power module uses 240 V
distribution frame. high-voltage DC input, use
the C19 straight female AC
Connect the brown wire to
power cable.
the L terminal, blue wire to
the N terminal, and the
yellow/green wire to the
ground terminal. Different
AC power cables may be
delivered in compliance
with local regulations or
customer requirements.
8.3 Ground Cable

Ground cables connect the chassis and cabinet to the ground. The ground cables are connected
on the front door, rear door, and side panels of a cabinet before delivery.
Figure 8-8 shows the structure of a ground cable.
Figure 8-8 Structure of a ground cable

Label
X1 X2
Pin Assignments
Table 8-2 lists the pin assignments of a ground cable.

Table 8-2 Pin assignments of a ground cable
X1 X2 Wire Color Conductor Length

Cross-
Sectional Area
OT-6 OT-6 Green-yellow 6 mm2 1m
8.4 Console Cable
Types of Console Cables

A console cable connects the switch console port to the serial port of a configuration terminal
to transmit configuration data.

Figure 8-9 shows the structure of a console cable.
Figure 8-9 Structure of a console cable

D-type connector
˄9-pin, female˅
Serial port connector
Pos.9 Pos.5 Label ˄8-pin, RJ-45˅
X2 1 8
Pos.6 Pos.1 X1
Pin Assignments
Table 8-3 lists the pin assignments of console cable connectors.
Table 8-3 Pin assignments of console cable connectors
Connector X1 (DB9) X2 (RJ45)
Pin assignment 2 3
3 6
5 5

Connection
A console cable has an RJ45 connector on one end and a DB9 connector on the other end. The
RJ45 connector is connected to the console port of the main processing unit, and the DB9
connector is connected to the serial port of a computer.
8.5 Clock Cable
Introduction
The external clock ports of a switch are used for clock and time synchronization.
A clock cable connects a switch to an external clock source or a time source device.
When a switch connects to external devices through clock cables, it provides the following
functions:
l Receives 2-channel 2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mbit/s clock signals from the upstream device
and delivers 2-channel 2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mbit/s clock signals to the downstream
device.
l Receives 2-channel ToD or DCLS time signals from the upstream device and delivers 2-
channel ToD or DCLS time signals to the downstream device.

RJ48 Cable
RJ48 cables applicable to the switch are 120-ohm trunk cables (shielded cables), as shown in
Figure 8-10.
Figure 8-10 Structure of a 120-ohm trunk cable
NOTE
To connect a switch to a clock source that has an RJ45 interface, use an RJ48 cable.
RJ45 Cable
RJ45 cables applicable to the switch are straight-through cables (shielded cables), as shown in
Figure 8-11.
Figure 8-11 Structure of a straight-through cable

NOTE
To connect a switch to a time source providing an RJ45 interface, use an RJ45 cable.
To connect a switch to a clock source that has a sub-miniature B (SMB) or bayonet-neill-concelman
(BNC) interface, use an RJ45 cable and a transmultiplexer.
SMB/SMB Trunk Cable
An SMB/SMB trunk cable is a 75-ohm trunk cable with SMB connectors at both ends, as
shown in Figure 8-12.
Figure 8-12 SMB/SMB trunk cable
SMB/BNC Trunk Cable

An SMB/BNC trunk cable is a 75-ohm trunk cable with an SMB connector at one end and a
BNC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 8-13.
Figure 8-13 SMB/BNC trunk cable
Connection
One end of a clock cable is an RJ45 connector that is connected to the BITS interface on the
Main Control Unit of the switch. The other end of the clock cable is connected to an external
clock device. The connector type depends on the type of the external clock device. The
external clock device can be a clock source that has an SMB, BNC, or RJ45 interface or a
time source providing an RJ45 interface.
Figure 8-14 Clock cable connections

Cable 2
Clock Cable 1 External clock
Transmultiplexer
interface device
SMB/BNC/RJ45
RJ45 interface SMB interface
interface
Based on the functions and interface types of the external clock device connected to the
switch, the following cables can be selected:
l When the connected device is a clock source with an RJ45 interface:
Cable 1 can be an RJ48 cable. No transmultiplexer or cable 2 is required.

l When the connected device is a time source with an RJ45 interface:

Cable 1 can be an RJ45 cable. No transmultiplexer or cable 2 is required.
l When the connected device is a clock source with an SMB interface:
Cable 1 can be an RJ45 cable, and cable 2 can be an SMB/SMB trunk cable. A
transmultiplexer is required.
l When the connected device is a clock source with a BNC interface:
Cable 1 can be an RJ45 cable, and cable 2 can be an SMB/BNC trunk cable. A
transmultiplexer is required.
8.6 Ethernet Cable
Types of Ethernet Cables

Ethernet cables include straight-through cables and crossover cables.
Structure
Straight-through cables and crossover cables are standard unshielded Ethernet cables with
RJ45 connectors, as shown in Figure 8-15.
Figure 8-15 Structure of an Ethernet cable

Main label
X1 X2
8
1
Pin Assignments
Table 8-4 lists pin assignments of a straight-through cable.

Table 8-4 Pin assignments of a straight-through cable

Connector Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1
X1.2 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Twisted pair
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown
Table 8-5 lists pin assignments of a crossover cable.
Table 8-5 Pin assignments of a crossover cable

Connector Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.2 X2.6 Green Twisted pair
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Twisted pair
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown
Connection
A straight-through cable connects Ethernet ports between the following devices:
l A router and a hub
l A router and an Ethernet switch
l A computer and an Ethernet switch
l A computer and a hub
A crossover cable connects Ethernet ports between the following devices:

l Two routers
l A router and a computer
l Two hubs
l A hub and a switch
l Two switches
l Two computers
8.7 High-Speed Cable
Types of High-Speed Cable

Table 8-6 describes different types of high-speed cables.
Table 8-6 Types of high-speed cables

Cable Type Model Length Electric Bend Connec Part
al Radius tor number
attribut Type
e
SFP+ - 1 m SFP SFP-10 1m Passive 25 mm SFP+ to 02310M

SFP+ + high- G- SFP+ UN
high- speed CU1M
speed cable
cable
3 m SFP SFP-10 3m Passive 25 mm SFP+ to 02310M
+ high- G- SFP+ UP
speed CU3M
cable
5 m SFP SFP-10 5m Passive 30 mm SFP+ to 02310Q

+ high- G- SFP+ PR
speed CU5M
cable
10 m SFP-10 10 m Active 25 mm SFP+ to 02310M

SFP+ G- SFP+ UQ
active AC10M
high-
speed
cable
QSFP+ - 1m QSFP-4 1m Passive 25 mm QSFP+ 02310M

4*SFP+ QSFP+ - SFP10G to 4*SFP UK
high- 4*SFP+ -CU1M +
speed high-
cable speed
cable


attribut Type
e
3m QSFP-4 3m Passive 25 mm QSFP+ 02310M

QSFP+ - SFP10G to 4*SFP UL
4*SFP+ -CU3M +
high-
speed
cable

QSFP+ - SFP10G to 4*SFP UM
4*SFP+ -CU5M +
high-
speed
cable
QSFP+ - 1m QSFP-4 1m Passive 35 mm QSFP+ 02310M

QSFP+ QSFP+ - 0G- to QSFP UG
high- QSFP+ CU1M +
speed high-
cable speed
cable

QSFP+ - 0G- to QSFP UH
QSFP+ CU3M +
high-
speed
cable

QSFP+ - 0G- to QSFP UJ
QSFP+ CU5M +
high-
speed
cable
QSFP28 1m QSFP28 1m Passive 70 mm QSFP28 02311K

- QSFP28 -100G- to NW
QSFP28 - CU1M QSFP28
high- QSFP28
speed high-
cable speed
cable


attribut Type
e
3m QSFP28 3m Passive 70 mm QSFP28 02311K

QSFP28 -100G- to NX
- CU3M QSFP28
QSFP28
high-
speed
cable
5m QSFP28 5m Passive 70 mm QSFP28 02311K

QSFP28 -100G- to NY
- CU5M QSFP28
QSFP28
high-
speed
cable
Do not reversely insert the QSFP+ cable plugs. The side with an L-shaped groove is the top of
a QSFP+ cable plug, as shown in Figure 8-16. Keep the top side up when inserting the QSFP
+ cable plug into a port.
Both ends of a QSFP+ high-speed cable must be covered by ESD caps.
If a port of an S series modular switch uses a high-speed copper cable, the port can only be
connected to another S series modular switch.
Figure 8-16 QSFP+ cable plug

Figure 8-17 shows an SFP+ - SFP+ high-speed cable.

Figure 8-17 SFP+ - SFP+ high-speed cable
Figure 8-18 shows a QSFP+ - QSFP+ and QSFP28 - QSFP28 high-speed cable.
Figure 8-18 QSFP+ - QSFP+ and QSFP28 - QSFP28 high-speed cable
Figure 8-19 shows a QSFP+ - 4*SFP+ high-speed cable.
Figure 8-19 QSFP+ - 4*SFP+ high-speed cable
Figure 8-20 shows the structure of an SFP+ - SFP+ high-speed cable.
Figure 8-20 Structure of an SFP+ - SFP+ high-speed cable
X2 X1
Figure 8-21 shows the structure of a QSFP+ - QSFP+ and QSFP28 - QSFP28 high-speed
cable.

Figure 8-21 Structure of a QSFP+ - QSFP+ and QSFP28 - QSFP28 high-speed cable
Front view:
Rear view:
Figure 8-22 shows the structure of a QSFP+ - 4*SFP+ high-speed cable.
Figure 8-22 Structure of a QSFP+ - 4*SFP+ high-speed cable
X1
X2 C
8.8 Optical Fiber
Active Optical Cable

An active optical cable (AOC) is an optical fiber with optical modules at both ends, making it
easy to use. Figure 8-23, Figure 8-24, and Figure 8-25 show the appearance of AOC cables.

Figure 8-23 SFP+ to SFP+ AOC cable
Figure 8-24 QSFP+ to QSFP+ or QSFP28 to QSFP28 AOC cable
Figure 8-25 QSFP+ to 4*SFP+ AOC cable
Table 8-7 lists the models and attributes of AOC cables.

Table 8-7 Attributes of AOC cables

Model Length Bend Connector Part Operating
Radius Type Number Temperatu
re
SFP-10G- 3m 30 mm SFP+ 02310QWG 0°C to 70°C

AOC3M connectors
at both ends
SFP-10G- 10 m 30 mm SFP+ 02310QWH 0°C to 70°C

AOC10M connectors
at both ends
QSFP- 10 m 25 mm QSFP+ 02310SSH 0°C to 70°C

H40G- connectors
AOC10M at both ends
QSFP-4SFP 10 m 25 mm QSFP+ 02310SSJ 0°C to 70°C

10- connector at
AOC10M one end and
four SFP+
connectors
at the other
end
QSFP-100G- 10 m 25 mm QSFP28 02311KNQ 0°C to 70°C

AOC-10M connectors
at both ends
Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper consists of one or more fibers of a certain length and the optical connectors at
both ends. A fiber jumper connects an optical module to a fiber terminal box.
NOTE
l The MPO-MPO and MPO-2*MPO fibers have similar appearances except for the number of MPO
connectors at the other end. The following figures show an MPO-MPO fiber for example.
l The MPO-4*DLC and MPO-10*DLC fibers have similar appearances except for the number of
DLC connectors at the other end.
l The MPO-MPO fibers for S series switches use type B connectors (key Up/key Up).
Figure 8-26 shows a single-mode LC/PC fiber jumper.

Figure 8-26 Single-mode LC/PC fiber jumper
Figure 8-27 shows a multimode LC/PC fiber jumper.
Figure 8-27 Multimode LC/PC fiber jumper
Figure 8-28 shows a single-mode SC/PC fiber jumper.

Figure 8-28 Single-mode SC/PC fiber jumper
Figure 8-29 shows an MPO-MPO fiber jumper.
Figure 8-29 MPO-MPO fiber jumper
Figure 8-30 shows an MPO-4*DLC fiber jumper.
Figure 8-30 MPO-4*DLC fiber jumper

Figure 8-31 shows an MPO-10*DLC fiber jumper.
Figure 8-31 MPO-10*DLC fiber jumper
Comply with the following rules when selecting fiber jumpers:

1. Determine the length of fiber jumpers based on the onsite cabling distance.
2. Determine the fiber type based on the optical module type.
– Use a multimode fiber jumper for a multimode optical module.
– Use a single-mode fiber jumper for a single-mode optical module.
3. Determine the optical connector type based on the interface type.
Ensure that the optical connector at each end of a fiber jumper is the same type as the
interface to which it will be connected.
Figure 8-32 shows the structure of an 8-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper.

Figure 8-32 Structure of an 8-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper
X2 X1
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
NA NA
NA NA
NA NA
NA NA
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
Figure 8-33 shows the structure of a 12-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper.
Figure 8-33 Structure of a 12-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper
X1 X2
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12

Figure 8-34 shows the structure of a 24-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper.
Figure 8-34 Structure of a 24-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper
X1 X2
1 13 1 13
2 X1 14 2 X2 14
3 15 3 15
4 16 4 16
5 17 5 17
6 18 6 18
7 19 7 19
8 20 8 20
9 21 9 21
10 22 10 22
11 23 11 23
12 24 12 24
Figure 8-35 shows the structure of an MPO-4*DLC fiber jumper.

Figure 8-35 Structure of an MPO-4*DLC fiber jumper
X1
1A
X2 1B
2A
2B
4A
1 4B
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 8-36 shows the structure of an MPO-2*MPO fiber jumper.

Figure 8-36 Structure of an MPO-2*MPO fiber jumper

X2
X1
X3
13 1 1
X1 X2/X3
14 2 2
15 3 3
16 4 4
17 5 5
18 6 6
19 7 7
20 8 8
21 9 9
22 10 10
23 11 11
24 12 12
Figure 8-37 shows the structure of an MPO-10*DLC fiber jumper.

Figure 8-37 Structure of an MPO-10*DLC fiber jumper
X2
1B
X1 1A
2B
2A
10B
1 13 10A
2 14
3 15
4 16
5 17
6 18
7 19
8 20
9 21
10 22
11 23
12 24
Table 8-8 lists the pin assignments of an 8-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper.
Table 8-8 Pin assignments of an 8-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper
X1 Pin X2 Pin
1 12
2 11
3 10
4 9
NA NA
NA NA
NA NA
NA NA
9 4
10 3
11 2

X1 Pin X2 Pin
12 1
Table 8-9 lists the pin assignments of a 12-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper.
Table 8-9 Pin assignments of a 12-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper
X1 Pin X2 Pin
1 12
2 11
3 10
4 9
5 8
6 7
7 6
8 5
9 4
10 3
11 2
12 1
Table 8-10 lists the pin assignments of a 24-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper.
Table 8-10 Pin assignments of a 24-strand MPO-MPO fiber jumper
X1 Pin X2 Pin X1 Pin X2 Pin
1 24 13 12
2 23 14 11
3 22 15 10
4 21 16 9
5 20 17 8
6 19 18 7
7 18 19 6

8 17 20 5
9 16 21 4
10 15 22 3
11 14 23 2
12 13 24 1
Table 8-11 lists the pin assignments of an MPO-4*DLC fiber jumper.
Table 8-11 Pin assignments of an MPO-4*DLC fiber jumper
X2 Pin X1 Pin
1 1A
2 2A
3 3A
4 4A
9 4B
10 3B
11 2B
12 1B
Table 8-12 lists the pin assignments of an MPO-2*MPO fiber jumper.
Table 8-12 Pin assignments of an MPO-2*MPO fiber jumper
X1 Pin X2 Pin X3 Pin
2 12 NA
3 11 NA
4 10 NA
5 9 NA
7 NA 12
8 NA 11
9 NA 10

X1 Pin X2 Pin X3 Pin
10 NA 9
14 1 NA
15 2 NA
16 3 NA
17 4 NA
19 NA 1
20 NA 2
21 NA 3
22 NA 4
Table 8-13 lists the pin assignments of an MPO-10*DLC fiber jumper.
Table 8-13 Pin assignments of an MPO-10*DLC fiber jumper

2 1A 14 1B
3 2A 15 2B
4 3A 16 3B
5 4A 17 4B
6 5A 18 5B
7 6A 19 6B
8 7A 20 7B
9 8A 21 8B
10 9A 22 9B
11 10A 23 10B
Fiber Pigtail
A fiber pigtail is an optical fiber that has an optical connector on one end and a piece of
exposed fiber at the other end. The exposed fiber can be fused to another optical fiber. Fiber
pigtails are commonly used to connect optical fibers to optical modules in fiber terminal
boxes (couplers and jumpers are also used). Figure 8-38 shows the structure of a fiber pigtail.

Figure 8-38 Structure of a fiber pigtail
Fiber pigtails are classified into single-mode and multimode fiber pigtails and are used for
short-distance connections.
Optical Fiber, Optical Connector, and Fiber Adapter

Optical Fibers
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode fibers and multimode fibers.
l Single-mode fibers have a diameter of 5-10 μm and transmit laser in one mode under a
specified wavelength. These fibers support a wide frequency band and a large
transmission capacity, so they are used for long-distance transmission. Most single-mode
fibers are yellow, as shown in Figure 8-26.
l Multimode fibers have a diameter of 50 μm or 62.5 μm and transmit laser light in
multiple modes with a specified wavelength. These fibers have a lower transmission
capacity than single-mode fibers and are used for short-distance transmission. Model
dispersion occurs during transmission over multimode fibers.
In the latest cabling infrastructure of ISO/IEC 11801, multimode fibers are classified into
four categories: OM1, OM2, OM3, and OM4.
– OM1: traditional 62.5/125 μm multimode fibers. OM1 fibers have a large core
diameter and numerical aperture, and provide high light gathering ability and
bending resistance.
– OM2: traditional 50/125 μm multimode fibers. OM2 fibers have a small core
diameter and numerical aperture. Compared with OM1 fibers, OM2 fibers provide
higher bandwidth because they significantly reduce the modal dispersion. When
transmitting data at 1 Gbit/s with 850 nm wavelength, OM1 and OM2 fibers
support maximum link lengths of 220 m and 550 m, respectively. OM1 and OM2
fibers can provide sufficient bandwidth within a distance of 300 m. Generally, OM1
and OM2 fibers are orange, as shown in Figure 8-27.
– OM3: new-generation multimode fibers, with longer transmission distances than
OM1 and OM2 fibers.
– OM4: laser optimized multimode fibers with 50 μm core diameter. OM4 is an
improvement to OM3 and only increases the modal bandwidth. OM4 fibers provide
4700 MHz*km of modal bandwidth, whereas OM3 fibers provide only 2000
MHz*km of modal bandwidth. Generally, OM3 and OM4 fibers are light green, as
shown in Figure 8-29. You can identify OM3 and OM4 fibers by their labels or
printed marks.

MPO fibers are used for 40G and 100G optical modules. An MPO fiber consists of multiple
multi-mode fiber strands, and each multi-mode fiber strand provides one laser transmission
channel. Some fiber suppliers produce 8-strand MPO optical fibers, while some suppliers
produce 12-strand or 24-strand MPO fibers.
l A 40G optical module uses four channels to transmit laser and four channels to receive
laser. That is, a total of eight channels are required for a 40G optical module. 8-strand
and 12-strand MPO fibers use the same definition of fiber channels. Therefore, they are
equivalent in functionality when connecting to 40G optical modules.
l When 100G optical modules are used, choose MPO fibers according to the following
rules:
– For CFP optical modules, choose 24-strand fibers for the CFP-100G-SR10 module
and 8-strand or 12-strand fibers for other modules.
– Choose 8-strand or 12-strand fibers for QSFP28 modules.
Optical Connector
Optical connectors are used to connect optical fibers of the same type. Table 8-14 lists
common optical connectors.
Table 8-14 Common optical connectors
Connector Optical Connector

Type
Square SC/PC LC/PC MTRJ/PC MPO connector

connector connector connector connector
Round FC/PC ST/PC - -

connector connector connector
Figure 8-39 shows an LC/PC optical connector.
Figure 8-39 LC/PC optical connector

When connecting or removing an LC/PC optical connector, align the connector with the
optical port and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following points:
l To connect a fiber, align the optical connector with the optical port and gently insert the
optical fiber into the port.
l To remove a fiber, press the clip on the connector and pull the fiber out.
Fiber Adapter
A fiber adapter (also called a flange) is a fiber connection component. Two fiber connectors
need to be connected using a fiber adapter. Fiber adapters are widely used in optical
distribution frames (ODFs), fiber transmission equipment, and optical instruments.

Hardware Description 9 Pluggable Modules for Interfaces
9 Pluggable Modules for Interfaces
About This Chapter
9.1 Important Notes About Using Optical Modules Certified for Huawei Switches
9.2 Understanding Optical Modules
9.3 Understanding Copper Modules
9.4 FE SFP/eSFP Optical Modules
9.5 GE eSFP Optical Modules
9.6 POS eSFP Optical Modules
9.7 GE-CWDM eSFP Optical Modules
9.8 GE-DWDM eSFP Optical Modules
9.9 GE SFP Copper Modules
9.11 10GE-CWDM SFP+ Optical Modules
9.12 10GE-DWDM SFP+ Optical Modules
9.13 10GE XFP Optical Modules
9.14 10GE-CWDM XFP Optical Modules
9.15 10GE-DWDM XFP Optical Modules
9.16 40GE QSFP+ Optical Modules
9.17 40GE CFP Optical Modules
9.19 100GE QSFP28 Optical Modules

9.1 Important Notes About Using Optical Modules

Certified for Huawei Switches
9.1.1 How to Identify Huawei-Certified Switch Optical Modules
l A switch must use optical or copper modules that have been certified for use on Huawei
switches. Non-certified optical or copper modules cannot ensure transmission reliability
and may affect service stability. Huawei is not liable for any problem caused by the use of
non-certified optical or copper modules and will not fix such problems.
l The methods provided here are only for reference. To confirm whether optical modules
you are using have been certified for use on Huawei switches, contact Huawei technical
support.
10GE or Lower Speed Optical Modules

Huawei started certification on 10GE or lower speed optical modules for switch products on
July 1, 2013.
To determine whether optical modules delivered for Huawei switches before July 1, 2013 are
certified ones, contact Huawei technical support.
If your optical modules are delivered after July 1, 2013, use either of the following methods to
determine whether they have been certified by Huawei.
Method 1: Check for "HUAWEI" on the label
If an optical module has been certified by Huawei, its label contains "HUAWEI", as shown in
Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 "HUAWEI" on the label of a Huawei-certified switch optical module
Method 2: Run the display transceiver command
An optical module has received Huawei switch certification if it meets the following
conditions:
l In the display elabel command output, the Manufactured field displays a date later than
2013-07-01.
l In the display version command output, the displayed version is V200R001C00 or later.
l In the display transceiver command output, the Vendor Name field displays HUAWEI.

NOTE
The SFP-FE-SX-MM1310 (part number: 02315233) is a Huawei-certified 100M optical module.

However, the Vendor Name field displays the original manufacturer name, instead of HUAWEI.
For copper modules, the Vendor Name field also displays the original manufacturer name, instead of
HUAWEI.
40GE and 100GE Optical Modules

Huawei started certification on 40GE and 100GE optical modules for switch products on
January 1, 2016.
To determine whether optical modules delivered for Huawei switches before January 1, 2016
are certified ones, contact Huawei technical support.
If your optical modules are delivered after January 1, 2016, use either of the following
methods to determine whether they have been certified by Huawei.
Method 1: Check for "HUAWEI" on the label
If an optical module has been certified by Huawei, its label contains "HUAWEI", as shown in
Figure 9-1.
Method 2: Run the display transceiver command
A 40GE or 100GE optical module has received Huawei switch certification if it meets the
following conditions:
l In the display elabel command output, the Manufactured field displays a date later than
2016-01-01.
l In the display version command output, the displayed version is V200R008 or later.
l In the display transceiver command output, the Vendor Name field displays HUAWEI.
NOTE
For the optical modules connected to high-speed cables or AOC cables, the Vendor Name field displays
the original manufacturer name, instead of HUAWEI. For the methods of checking whether such an
optical module has been certified by Huawei, contact technical support personnel.
9.1.2 Risks of Using Non-Huawei-Certified Switch Optical

Modules
During certification of optical modules for Huawei switches, Huawei completes

comprehensive functionality verification to ensure quality of optical modules. The verified
items include optical module plug/unplug, transmit optical power, receive optical power,
signal transmission quality, data reading, error tolerance, compatibility, electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC), and environmental parameters.
Non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules may cause the following problems:
l Non-standard structure and size cause failures to install optical modules on adjacent
optical interfaces.
Structures or sizes of some non-Huawei-certified optical modules do not comply with the
Multi-Source Agreement (MSA). When such an optical module is installed on an optical
interface, the size of this optical module hinders optical module installation on adjacent
optical interfaces.

l Data bus defects cause suspension of a switch's data bus.

Some non-Huawei-certified optical modules have defects in data bus designs. Using such
an optical module on a switch causes suspension of the connected data bus on the switch.
As a result, data on the suspended bus cannot be read.
l Improper edge connector size damages electronic devices of optical interfaces.
If a non-Huawei-certified switch optical module with improper edge connector size is
used on an optical interface, electronic devices of the optical interface will be damaged
by short circuits.
l Unnormalized temperature monitoring causes incorrect alarms.
The temperature monitoring systems of some non-Huawei-certified switch optical
modules do not comply with industry standards and report temperature values higher
than the real temperature. When such optical modules are used on a switch, the system
will report incorrect temperature alarms.
l Improper register settings cause errors or failures in reading parameters or diagnostic
information.
Some non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules have improper register values on
page A0, which can cause errors or failures when the system attempts to read parameters
or diagnostic information from a data bus.
l Some non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules are not designed in compliance with
EMC standards and have low anti-interference capability. Additionally, they bring
electromagnetic interference to nearby devices.
l The operating temperature ranges of non-Huawei-certified switch optical modules
cannot meet service requirements. When they are used under relatively high temperature,
the optical power decreases, resulting in service interruption.
9.2 Understanding Optical Modules
9.2.1 What Is an Optical Module

On an optical network, a sender needs to convert electrical signals into optical signals before
sending them to a receiver, and the receiver needs to convert received optical signals into
electrical signals. An optical module is a component that completes electrical/optical
conversion on an optical network. Figure 9-2 shows the structure of an optical module.

Figure 9-2 Structure of an optical module (using an SFP/eSFP optical module as an example)
1. Handle 2. Receiver 3. Transmitter

4. Shell 5. Label 6. Dust plug
7. Spring 8. Connector -
Figure 9-3 shows an SFP/eSFP optical module.
Figure 9-3 SFP/eSFP optical module

Figure 9-4 shows the appearance of an SFP+ optical module.
Figure 9-4 Appearance of an SFP+ optical module
Figure 9-5 and Figure 9-6 show the appearance of a QSFP+ optical module.
Figure 9-5 Appearance of a QSFP+ optical module (for LC optical fibers)

Figure 9-6 Appearance of a QSFP+ optical module (for MPO optical fibers)
The side with an L-shaped notch close to the connector is the top of a QSFP+ optical module,
as shown in Figure 9-5. When connecting a QSFP+ optical module to a port, keep the top
side upward. Do not insert the QSFP+ optical module upside down.
Currently, there is no formal standard for 40G Ethernet. Therefore, a device may not display
complete diagnostic information about 40GE optical modules. This is an acceptable fact in the
telecommunications industry and does not affect functions of 40GE optical modules.
Figure 9-7 shows the appearance of a CSFP optical module.
Figure 9-7 Appearance of a CSFP optical module
Figure 9-8 shows the appearance of an XFP module.

Figure 9-8 Appearance of an XFP optical module
NOTE
The SFP+ and XFP optical modules are 10GE hot-pluggable optical modules. Compared with the SFP+
optical modules, the XFP optical modules have a larger caliber.
Figure 9-9 and Figure 9-10 show CFP optical modules for different optical fibers.
Figure 9-9 CFP 100GE optical module (for LC optical fibers)

Figure 9-10 CFP 100GE optical module (for MPO optical fibers)
Figure 9-11 and Figure 9-12 show the appearance of a QSFP28 optical module.
Figure 9-11 Appearance of a QSFP28 optical module (for MPO optical fibers)
Figure 9-12 Appearance of a QSFP28 optical module (for LC optical fibers)

9.2.2 Types of Optical Modules
Optical modules are available in various types to meet diversified requirements.
l Classified by transmission rates

Depending on transmission rates, optical modules are classified into 100GE, 40GE,
10GE, FE, and GE optical modules.
l Classified by encapsulation types
The higher transmission rate an optical module provides, the more complex structure it
has. Optical modules are encapsulated in different modes to provide different structures.
Huawei switches support optical modules of the following encapsulation types: CFP,
QSFP+, QSFP28, XFP, SFP, eSFP, and SFP+. All optical modules are hot swappable.
– SFP: small form-factor pluggable. SFP optical modules support LC fiber
connectors.
– eSFP: enhanced small form-factor pluggable. An eSFP module is an SFP module
that supports monitoring of voltage, temperature, bias current, transmit optical
power, and receive optical power. Therefore, eSFP is also called SFP sometimes.
– SFP+: small form-factor pluggable plus, SFP with a higher rate. SFP+ optical
modules are more sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) because they
have a higher rate. To reduce EMI, SFP+ optical modules have more springs than
SFP optical modules and the cages for SFP+ modules on a card are tighter.
– XFP: 10 Gigabit small form-factor pluggable. X is the Roman numeral 10, meaning
that all XFP optical modules provide a 10 Gbit/s transmission rate. XFP optical
modules support LC fiber connectors. They are wider and longer than SFP+ optical
modules.
– QSFP+: quad small form-factor pluggable. QSFP+ optical modules support MPO
fiber connectors and are larger than SFP+ optical modules.
– CFP: centum form-factor pluggable. The dimensions of a CFP optical module are
144.75 mm x 82 mm x 13.6 mm (L x W x H). CFP is a new optical module
standard that can be used in data communication and telecommunications fields.
– QSFP28: with the same interface size as a QSFP+ module. A QSFP28 interface can
use a 100GE QSFP28 optical module or a 40GE QSFP+ optical module.
l Classified by physical layer standards
Different physical layer standards are defined to allow data transmission in different
modes. Therefore, different types of optical modules are produced to comply with these
standards. For details, see Standards compliance of the specific optical module.
l Classified by modes
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode and multimode fibers. Therefore, optical
modules are also classified into single-mode and multimode modules to support different
optical fibers.
– Single-mode optical modules are used with single-mode fibers. Single-mode fibers
support a wide band and large transmission capacity, and are used for long-distance
transmission.
– Multimode optical modules are used with multimode fibers. Multimode fibers have
lower transmission performance than single-mode fibers because of modal
dispersion, but their costs are also lower. They are used for small-capacity, short-
distance transmission.

Wavelength division multiplexing modules differ from other optical modules in center
wavelengths. A common optical module has a center wavelength of 850 nm, 1310 nm, or
1550 nm, whereas a wavelength division multiplexing module transmits lights with different
center wavelengths. Wavelength division multiplexing modules are classified into two types:
coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) and dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM). Within the same band, DWDM modules are available in more types
and use wavelength resources more efficiently than CWDM modules. DWDM and CWDM
modules allow lights with different center wavelengths to be transmitted on one fiber without
interfering each other. Therefore, a passive multiplexer can be used to combine the lights into
one channel, which is then split into multiple channels by a demultiplexer on the remote end.
This reduces the optical fibers required. DWDM and CWDM modules are used for long-
distance transmission.
The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its overload power.
Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical fibers of an appropriate length to
ensure that the actual receive power is smaller than the overload power. If the optical fibers
connected to a long-distance optical module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce
the receive power on the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical module may
be burnt. Generally, an optical attenuator is required if an optical module supporting a
transmission distance longer than 10 km is used together with short optical fibers.
9.2.3 Parameter Description
Transmit optical power Output optical power of an optical module when it is working properly. When two
optical modules are connected, the transmit optical power of one end must be within
the range of receive optical power on the other end.
Receive optical power Average input optical power that the receiver of an optical module can receive within
a range of bit error rate (BER = 10-12). The upper limit of this parameter is the
overload optical power and the lower limit is the maximum receiver sensitivity. When
two optical modules are connected, the receive optical power on one end determines
the range of transmit optical power on the other end.
Maximum receiver Minimum average input optical power that the receiver of an optical module can
sensitivity receive within a range of bit error rate (BER = 10-12). When two optical modules are
connected, the maximum receiver sensitivity on one end determines the minimum
value of transmit optical power on the other end.
Overload optical Maximum average input optical power that the receiver of an optical module can
power receive within a range of bit error rate (BER = 10-12). When two optical modules are
connected, the overload optical power on one end determines the maximum transmit
optical power on the other end.
Extinction ratio Minimum ratio of the average optical power with signals transmitted against the
average optical power without signals transmitted in complete modulation mode. The
extinction ratio indicates the capability of an optical module to identify signal 0 and
signal 1. This parameter is a quality indicator for optical modules. Optical modules
with a large extinction ratio may not have good quality. Qualified optical modules
should have an extinction ratio complying with IEEE 802.3.

Fiber mode Mode of optical fibers defined based on core diameters and features of optical fibers.
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode and multimode fibers. Generally,
multimode fibers have large core diameters and severe dispersion, so they transmit
optical signals over short distances. Single-mode fibers have low dispersion and can
transmit optical signals over long distances.
Modal bandwidth Bandwidth measured at a point with transmit power several dB lower than that of the
point with the peak center wavelength. Modal bandwidth reflects spectrum
characteristics of multimode fibers. The higher modal bandwidth a multimode fiber
has, the longer transmission distance the fiber supports.
Fiber diameter Diameter of the core of a fiber. According to international standards for optical fibers,
the diameter of a multimode fiber is 62.5 um or 50 um, and the diameter of a single-
mode fiber is 9 um. Select optical fibers with diameters supported by the optical
modules.
Fiber class Optical signals with different wavelengths have their best working windows in
different optical fibers. To help efficiently adjust wavelengths or dispersion features of
optical fibers and change their refractive indexes, the following fiber classes are
defined: multimode fiber (G.651), common single-mode fiber (G.652), shifted
dispersion fiber (G.653), and non-zero shifted dispersion fiber (G.655). G.651 and G.
652 are commonly used fiber classes. Optical fibers of higher classes support longer
transmission distances. When selecting optical fibers for optical modules, determine
the classes of fibers based on the required transmission distances.
Connector type Type of the interface on an optical module to accommodate a fiber. Commonly used
connector types are LC (applicable to all the SFP, SFP+, and XFP modules), SC, and
MPO (applicable to 150 m QSFP+ and CXP modules). Select optical fibers with
connectors supported by the optical modules.
Transmission distance Maximum distance over which optical signals can transmit. Optical signals sent from
different types of sources can transmit over different distances due to negative effects
of optical fibers, such as dispersion and attenuation. When connecting optical
interfaces, select optical modules and fibers based on the maximum signal
transmission distance.
Interface rate Maximum rate of electrical signals that an optical component can transmit without bit
errors. The interface rates defined in Ethernet standards include 125 Mbit/s, 1.25
Gbit/s, 10.3125 Gbit/s, and 41.25 Gbit/s. When connecting optical interfaces, select
optical modules and fibers based on the maximum signal transmission rate.
Center wavelength Wavelength measured at the midpoint of the half-amplitude line in the transmit
spectrum. Two connected optical modules must have the same center wavelength.
MSA Multi-Source Agreement, a non-profit organization jointly established by optical

module manufacturers. This agreement defines the structure and dimensions of optical
transceivers by referring to Optical Internetworking Forum (OIF) and International
Telecommunication Union (ITU) standards.
9.2.4 How to View Optical Module Parameters

Viewing the Hardware Description

If you know the model or type of an optical module, you can view the section "Pluggable
Modules for Interfaces" in the Hardware Description to look up parameters of the optical
module, including the center wavelength, transmission distance, fiber types supported, receive
optical power, and transmit optical power.
Using a Command
If an optical module is installed in a running switch, you can run the display transceiver
command to view parameters of the optical module, including the center wavelength,
transmission distance, fiber types supported, receive optical power, and transmit optical
power.
9.2.5 Rules for Optical Module Interoperation
Interoperation Rules
Optical modules with the same standards can interoperate with each other. The standards
define the rate, wavelength, and transmission distance of optical modules, but not their
encapsulation modes (two interoperated optical modules can have different encapsulation
modes).
If you need to achieve interoperability between optical modules with different standards,
contact technical support personnel.
When Huawei switches are connected to other products such as routers, comply with the
preceding optical module interoperation rules.
Standards Description
The following describes the standards, using 1000BASE-LX10 as an example:
l 1000 indicates the rate (1000 Mbit/s, in this case). Other rates include 10 Mbit/s, 100
Mbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s.
l BASE indicates baseband transmission.
l L represents a center wavelength of the laser. Currently, the following center
wavelengths are available: S (short wavelength: 850 nm), L (long wavelength: 1310 nm),
E (extra long wavelength: 1550 nm), and B (single-fiber bidirectional long wavelength).
l X represents the encoding format. The encoding formats include T (twisted pair), X (8B/
10B), R (64B/66B), and W (WIS).
l 10 indicates the number of channels. Currently, the value can be 4 or 10. If there is no
number, the value is 1.
NOTE
This example provides the definitions in IEEE standards, which are not applicable to all optical
modules, for example, non-standard optical modules.
The following organizations or agreements define standards related to optical modules:
l IEEE 802.3, which defines MAC and PHY standards
l Small Form Factor (SFF) committee or Multi-Source Agreements (MSAs), which define optical
module hardware, software, and structure standards

Interoperability of 40GE and 100GE Optical Modules

Huawei S series switches support the following types of 40GE and 100GE optical modules:
l 40GE QSFP+ optical modules

l 40GE CFP optical modules
l 100GE CFP optical modules
l 100GE QSFP28 optical modules
Figure 9-13 Interoperability of 40GE optical modules in different encapsulation modes

40GE QSFP+ 40GE CFP
40GBASE-SR4 40GBASE-SR4
40GBASE-iSR4
40GBASE-eSR4
40GBASE-BIDI
40GBASE-PAM4
Standards 40GBASE-ePAM4
40GBASE-LX4
40GBASE-iSM4
40GBASE-eSM4
40GBASE-LR4 40GBASE-LR4
40GBASE-ER4 40GBASE-ER4
40GBASE-ZR4

Figure 9-14 Interoperability of 100GE optical modules in different encapsulation modes

100GE QSFP28 100GE CFP
100GBASE-SR4
100GBASE-SR10
100GBASE-eSR4
100GBASE-PSM4
Standards 100GBASE-CLR4
100GBASE-CWDM4
100GBASE-LR4 100GBASE-LR4
100GBASE-ER4-lite
100GBASE-ER4
NOTE
Optical modules complying with the standards connected in the preceding figures can interoperate with
each other.
iSR4 and eSR4 are non-standard formats derived from SR4, and support interoperation with SR4.
A 40GBASE-PAM4 optical module can interoperate with a 40GBASE-ePAM4 optical module.
A 100GBASE-CLR4 optical module can interoperate with a 100GBASE-CWDM4 optical module.
A 100GBASE-ER4-lite optical module can interoperate with a 100GBASE-ER4 optical module, at a
maximum distance of 30 km.
9.3 Understanding Copper Modules

Copper modules are also called RJ45 modules. Unlike optical modules, copper modules do
not perform electrical-optical conversion. When two optical interfaces have copper modules
installed, the interfaces can be connected using a copper cable. Currently, Huawei offers only
GE copper modules with RJ45 interfaces. GE copper modules work with Category 5 network
cables, comply with 1000BASE-T (IEEE 802.3ab), and support a maximum transmission
distance of 100 m.

Figure 9-15 shows a GE SFP copper module.
Figure 9-15 Appearance of a GE SFP copper module
9.4 FE SFP/eSFP Optical Modules
9.4.1 SFP-FE-SX-MM1310
Table 9-1 Technical specifications
Item Description
Transceiver form factor SFP
Transmission speed FE
Center wavelength (nm) 1310
Standards compliance 100BASE-FX
Connector type LC
Applicable cable and Multimode fiber (50 μm or 62.5 μm diameter): 2 km

maximum transmission
distance
Transmit power (dBm) -19.0 to -14.0
Maximum receiver -30.0

sensitivity (dBm)
Overload power (dBm) -14.0
Extinction ratio (dB) 10

Item Description
Operating temperature 0°C to 70°C (32°F to 158°F)
9.4.2 eSFP-FE-LX-SM1310
Item Description
Transceiver form factor eSFP
Standards compliance Non-standard
Connector type LC
Applicable cable and Single-mode fiber: 15 km

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Extinction ratio (dB) 8.2
9.4.3 S-SFP-FE-LH40-SM1310
Item Description
Transceiver type eSFP

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) -5.0 to 0

sensitivity (dBm)
9.4.4 S-SFP-FE-LH80-SM1550

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

9.4.5 SFP-FE-LX-SM1310-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional

Module)

Item Description
Center wavelength (nm) Rx: 1550/Tx: 1310
Standards compliance 100BASE-BX
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
NOTE
BIDI optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-FE-LX-SM1310-BIDI must be used with
SFP-FE-LX-SM1550-BIDI.
9.4.6 SFP-FE-LX-SM1550-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional

Module)

Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
NOTE
BIDI optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-FE-LX-SM1550-BIDI must be used with
SFP-FE-LX-SM1310-BIDI.
9.5 GE eSFP Optical Modules
9.5.1 eSFP-GE-SX-MM850

Item Description
Transmission speed GE
Standards compliance 1000BASE-SX
Connector type LC

Item Description
Applicable cable and l Multimode fiber (with modal bandwidth of 160 MHz*km
maximum transmission and diameter of 62.5 μm): 0.22 km
distance l Multimode fiber (OM1): 0.275 km
l Multimode fiber (with modal bandwidth of 400 MHz*km
and diameter of 50 μm): 0.5 km
l Multimode fiber (OM2): 0.55 km
l Multimode fiber (OM3): 1 km

sensitivity (dBm)
Overload power (dBm) 0
9.5.2 SFP-GE-LX-SM1310
Item Description
Standards compliance 1000BASE-LX10/LH
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
9.5.3 S-SFP-GE-LH40-SM1310
Item Description
Standards compliance 1000BASE-EX (non-standard)
Connector type LC

distance
Maximum receiver -23

sensitivity (dBm)
9.5.4 S-SFP-GE-LH40-SM1550
Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
9.5.5 S-SFP-GE-LH80-SM1550
Item Description
Standards compliance 1000BASE-ZX
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) -2.0 to +5.0

sensitivity (dBm)

9.5.6 eSFP-GE-ZX100-SM1550

Item Description
Standards compliance 1000BASE-ZX
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) 0 to 5

sensitivity (dBm)
9.5.7 SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional

Module)

Item Description
Standards compliance 1000BASE-BX10
Connector type LC

distance

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
NOTE
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-GE-LX-
SM1310-BIDI must be used with SFP-GE-LX-SM1490-BIDI.
9.5.8 SFP-GE-LX-SM1490-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional

Module)
Item Description
Standards compliance 1000BASE-BX10
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

NOTE
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-GE-LX-
SM1490-BIDI must be used with SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-BIDI.
9.5.9 LE2MGSC40DE0 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310KVV
NOTE
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, LE2MGSC40DE0
must be used with LE2MGSC40ED0.
9.5.10 LE2MGSC40ED0 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)
Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310KVU
NOTE
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, LE2MGSC40ED0
must be used with LE2MGSC40DE0.
9.5.11 SFP-GE-ZBXD1 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02311DDB
NOTE
This module can only be used on a switch running V200R008C00 or a later version. A switch running
an earlier version may fail to obtain information about this module.
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-GE-ZBXD1
must be used with SFP-GE-ZBXU1.
9.5.12 SFP-GE-ZBXU1 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311DDC
NOTE
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-GE-ZBXU1
must be used with SFP-GE-ZBXD1.

9.5.13 SFP-GE-BXU1-SC (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)
Item Description
Connector type SC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310TQH
9.6 POS eSFP Optical Modules
9.6.1 eSFP-SM1310-155M-2.5G-15km
Item Description
Transmission speed l 2.5 Gbit/s

l 622 Mbit/s
l 155 Mbit/s
Connector type LC

Item Description

distance
Transmit power (dBm) l -5.0 to 0 (2.5 Gbit/s)

l -15.0 to -8.0 (622 Mbit/s)
l -15.0 to -8.0 (155 Mbit/s)
Maximum receiver l -21.0 (2.5 Gbit/s)

sensitivity (dBm) l -31.0 (622 Mbit/s)
l -31.0 (155 Mbit/s)
Overload power (dBm) l 0 (2.5 Gbit/s)

l -8.0 (622 Mbit/s)
l -8.0 (155 Mbit/s)
Part number 02310CQV
9.6.2 eSFP-1310nm-L-16.1

Item Description

l 622 Mbit/s
l 155 Mbit/s
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) l -2.0 to +3.0 (2.5 Gbit/s)

l -3.0 to +2.0 (622 Mbit/s)
l -5.0 to 0 (155 Mbit/s)

Item Description

l -37.0 (155 Mbit/s)
Overload power (dBm) l -9.0 (2.5 Gbit/s)

l -8.0 (622 Mbit/s)
l -10.0 (155 Mbit/s)
Part number 02310CRH
9.6.3 eSFP-1550nm-L-16.2
Item Description

l 622 Mbit/s
l 155 Mbit/s
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) l -2.0 to +3.0 (2.5 Gbit/s)

l -3.0 to +2.0 (622 Mbit/s)
l -5.0 to 0 (155 Mbit/s)

l -37.0 (155 Mbit/s)
Overload power (dBm) l -9.0 (2.5 Gbit/s)

l -8.0 (622 Mbit/s)
l -10.0 (155 Mbit/s)

Item Description
Part number 02310CRL
9.7 GE-CWDM eSFP Optical Modules
9.7.1 CWDM-SFPGE-1471

Item Description
Standards compliance GE-CWDM
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) 0 to 5.0

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPN

Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPK
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02310LPH
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPL
Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02312AXN

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02312AXM


Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02312AXK

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPJ
9.8 GE-DWDM eSFP Optical Modules
9.8.1 DWDM-SFPGE-1560-61

Item Description
Center wavelength (nm) 1560.61
Standards compliance GE-DWDM
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LLE
9.9 GE SFP Copper Modules

9.9.1 SFP-1000BaseT

Item Description
Transceiver form factor SFP
Transmission speed The transmission speed varies depending on the port where
the copper transceiver module is used.
Standards compliance 1000BASE-T
Connector type RJ45
Surge protection Common mode: ±1 kV
Applicable cable and Ethernet cable: 0.1 km

distance
9.10.1 SFP-10G-USR

Item Description
Transceiver form factor SFP+
Transmission speed 10GE
Standards compliance 10GBASE-USR (non-standard)
Connector type LC
Applicable cable and Multimode fiber (OM3): 0.1 km

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Overload power (dBm) 0.5

Item Description
Part number 02310MNW
9.10.2 OSXD22N00
Table 9-34 Technical Specifications

Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-LRM
Connector type LC
maximum transmission and diameter of 50 μm): 0.1 km
distance l Multimode fiber (with modal bandwidth of 500 MHz*km
and diameter of 62.5 μm): 0.22 km
l Multimode fiber (OM1, OM2, OM3): 0.22 km

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310CRM
9.10.3 OMXD30000

Item Description

Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-SR
Connector type LC

sensitivity (dBm)
9.10.4 SFP-10G-iLR

Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-iLR (non-standard)
Connector type LC
Applicable cable and Single-mode fiber: 1.4 km

distance

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
Operating temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Part number 02311BJJ
NOTE
9.10.5 OSX010000
Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-LR
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
9.10.6 OSX040N01

Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-ER
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310CNF
9.10.7 SFP-10G-ER-1310
Item Description
Standards compliance Non-standard and compatible with the 10Gbase-ER
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02311RLX
NOTE
If the SFP-10G-ER-1310 is connected to a 10Gbase-ER standard optical module (1550nm, 10GE, 40km), the
maximum transmission distance is only 20km due to different specifications such as wavelength and
receiving sensitivity.
This module can only be used on a switch running V200R010C00 or a later version.
9.10.8 SFP-10G-ZR
Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-ZR
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310SNN
9.10.9 SFP-10G-BXU1 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)

Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-BX
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310QBJ
NOTE
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-10G-BXU1
must be used with SFP-10G-BXD1.
9.10.10 SFP-10G-BXD1 (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional Module)
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310QDT
NOTE
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-10G-BXD1
must be used with SFP-10G-BXU1.
9.10.11 SFP-10G-ER-SM1330-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional

Module)
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Overload power (dBm) -9
Part number 02311BJB

NOTE
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-10G-ER-
SM1330-BIDI must be used with SFP-10G-ER-SM1270-BIDI.
9.10.12 SFP-10G-ER-SM1270-BIDI (Single-Fiber-Bidirectional

Module)
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311BJC
NOTE
Single-fiber bidirectional (BIDI) optical modules must be used in pairs. For example, SFP-10G-ER-
SM1270-BIDI must be used with SFP-10G-ER-SM1330-BIDI.
9.11 10GE-CWDM SFP+ Optical Modules
9.11.1 SFP-10G-ZCW1471

Item Description
Standards compliance 10G-CWDM
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310SSG
9.11.2 SFP-10G-ZCW1491
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02310SSF
9.11.3 SFP-10G-ZCW1511
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310SSE
9.11.4 SFP-10G-ZCW1531
Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310SSD
9.11.5 SFP-10G-ZCW1551
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02310SSC
9.11.6 SFP-10G-ZCW1571
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310SSB
9.11.7 SFP-10G-ZCW1591
Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310SSA
9.11.8 SFP-10G-ZCW1611

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310SRY

9.12 10GE-DWDM SFP+ Optical Modules
9.12.1 SFP-10G-ZDWT
Item Description
Center wavelength (nm) 1529.16 to 1560.61
Standards compliance 10GBASE-DWDM
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) -1 to +3

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310YUT
NOTE
The optical module takes a long time to start. Therefore, a low optical power alarm may be generated
when such an optical module is installed on a switch.
9.13 10GE XFP Optical Modules
9.13.1 XFP-SX-MM850


Item Description
Transceiver type XFP
Standards compliance 10GBASE-SR
Connector type LC

sensitivity (dBm)
9.13.2 XFP-STM64-LX-SM1310

Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-LR
Connector type LC

Item Description

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
9.13.3 XFP-STM64-LH40-SM1550

Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-ER
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

9.13.4 XFP-STM64-SM1550-80km
Item Description
Standards compliance 10GBASE-ZR
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
9.14 10GE-CWDM XFP Optical Modules
9.14.1 CWDM-XFP10G-1471
Item Description
Transceiver form factor XFP
Connector type LC

Item Description

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LQS
9.14.2 CWDM-XFP10G-1491

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LQU

9.14.3 CWDM-XFP10G-1511

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LQV
9.14.4 CWDM-XFP10G-1531

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LQX
9.14.5 CWDM-XFP10G-1551

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LQY
9.14.6 CWDM-XFP10G-1571

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LRB
9.14.7 CWDM-XFP10G-1591
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02310LRC
9.14.8 CWDM-XFP10G-1611

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LRE
9.15 10GE-DWDM XFP Optical Modules
9.15.1 DWDM-XFP10G-1533-47

Item Description
Standards compliance 10G-DWDM
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LRN
9.15.2 DWDM-XFP10G-1534-25
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02310LRM
9.15.3 DWDM-XFP10G-1535-04
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LRL
9.15.4 DWDM-XFP10G-1552-52
Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LRK
9.15.5 DWDM-XFP10G-1553-33
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02310LRJ
9.15.6 DWDM-XFP10G-1554-13
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LRH
9.15.7 DWDM-XFP10G-1530-33
Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPW
9.15.8 DWDM-XFP10G-1549-32

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPV

9.15.9 DWDM-XFP10G-1531-12

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPU
9.15.10 DWDM-XFP10G-1531-90

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPS
9.15.11 DWDM-XFP10G-1550-12

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPQ
9.15.12 DWDM-XFP10G-1550-92

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LPP
9.15.13 DWDM-XFP10G-1532-68
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02310LQP
9.15.14 DWDM-XFP10G-1551-72
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LQN
9.15.15 DWDM-XFP10G-1529-55
Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310LQL
9.15.16 DWDM-XFP10G-1548-51
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02310LQK
9.16 40GE QSFP+ Optical Modules
9.16.1 QSFP-40G-SR4

Item Description
Transceiver form factor QSFP+
Standards compliance 40GBASE-SR4
Connector type MPO/PC (8-strand or 12-strand, type B, female connector)
Applicable cable and l Multimode fiber (OM3): 0.1 km

maximum transmission l Multimode fiber (OM4): 0.15 km
distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310MHQ
9.16.2 QSFP-40G-iSR4

Item Description

Item Description

40GBASE-iSR4 (non-standard)

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310MHR
NOTE
This module can connect a 40GE port to four 10GE ports using a 1-to-4 cable.
9.16.3 QSFP-40G-eSR4

Item Description
Standards compliance 40GBASE-eSR4 (non-standard)

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310RMB
NOTE
9.16.4 QSFP-40G-iSM4
Item Description
Standards compliance 40GBASE-iSM4 (non-standard)
Connector type MPO/APC (8-strand or 12-strand, type B, female connector)
Applicable cable and Single-mode fiber: 1.4 km

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02311DRW
NOTE
9.16.5 QSFP-40G-eSM4

Item Description
Standards compliance 40GBASE-eSM4 (non-standard)

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Operating temperature 0°C to 70°C
Part number 02311DTR
NOTE

9.16.6 QSFP-40G-LX4
Item Description
Center wavelength (nm) 1271, 1291, 1311, 1331
Standards compliance 40GBASE-LX4
Connector type LC

maximum transmission Multimode fiber (OM3): 0.15 km
distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311HNP
NOTE
When QSFP-40G-LX4 optical modules use multimode fibers, the fibers cannot be connected through
multiple optical distribution frames (ODFs).
9.16.7 QSFP-40G-LR4
Item Description
Standards compliance 40GBASE-LR4

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310MHS
9.16.8 QSFP-40G-ER4
Item Description
Standards compliance 40GBASE-ER4
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311BKT

NOTE
9.16.9 QSFP-40G-SR-BD

Item Description
Center wavelength (nm) 850, 900
Standards compliance 40GBASE-BIDI (non-standard)
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Overload power (dBm) 5

NOTICE
Temporary interruption or packet loss may occur on ports of the
switch if the operating temperature is below 10°C (50°F).
Part number 02311FPA
NOTE
QSFP-40G-SR-BD optical modules cannot be used for CSS or stack connection and do not support
some digital diagnostic monitoring (DDM) function.
9.16.10 QSFP-40G-SDLC-PAM

Item Description
Standards compliance 40GBASE-PAM4 (non-standard)
Connector type LC
Applicable cable and l Multimode fiber (OM3): 100 m

maximum transmission l Multimode fiber (OM4): 150 m
distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311PUU
NOTE
9.16.11 QSFP-40G-eSDLC-PAM
Item Description
Standards compliance 40GBASE-ePAM4 (non-standard)
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) -2 to +2.4

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311QTR
NOTE
9.17.1 CFP-40G-SR4
Item Description
Transceiver form factor CFP

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311CXC

NOTE
9.17.2 CFP-40G-LR4
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) -4 to +3.5

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310YTF
9.17.3 CFP-40G-ER4
Item Description
Connector type LC

Item Description

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310YTH
9.17.4 CFP-40G-ZR4

Item Description
Center wavelength (nm) 1531.12, 1537.4, 1543.73, 1550.12
Standards compliance 40GBASE-ZR4
Connector type LC

distance
Transmit power (dBm) 0 to +4.5

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311KAH

NOTE
9.18.1 CFP-100G-SR10

Item Description
Connector type MPO/PC (24-strand, type B, female connector)

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310YTB
NOTE
This module can connect a 100GE port to two 40GE ports using a 1-to-2 cable or to ten 10GE ports using a 1-
to-10 cable.
9.18.2 CFP-100G-LR4

Item Description

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02310YTD
9.18.3 CFP-100G-ER4
Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)

Item Description
Part number 02310YTE
NOTE
CFP-100G-ER4 optical modules are used in the following scenarios:

l When the transmission distance is less than 10 km, the optical power on the receive end is higher
than 1 dBm. In this case, use a 10 dB optical attenuator to reduce the receive optical power.
l When the transmission distance is longer than or equal to 10 km and less than 25 km, the optical
power on the receive end is higher than -4 dBm and lower than or equal to 1 dBm. In this case, use a
5 dB optical attenuator to reduce the receive optical power.
l When the transmission distance is in the range of 25 km and 40 km, the optical power on the receive
end is lower than or equal to -4 dBm. In this case, no optical attenuator is required.
9.19 100GE QSFP28 Optical Modules
9.19.1 QSFP28-100G-LR4

Item Description
Transceiver form factor QSFP28
Connector type LC
Applicable cable and Single-mode fiber (G.652): 10 km

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311KNU

9.19.2 QSFP28-100G-10KM

Item Description
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311SYT
9.19.3 QSFP28-100G-PSM4

Item Description
Standards compliance 100GBASE-PSM4 (non-standard)
Applicable cable and Single-mode fiber (G.652): 500 m

distance
Transmit power (dBm) -9.4 to +2

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311MNM
9.19.4 QSFP28-100G-SR4

Item Description

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311GBW
9.19.5 QSFP-100G-eSR4


Item Description
Standards compliance 100GBase-eSR4 (non-standard)

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Extinction ratio (dB) ≥2
Part number 02311PSH
NOTE
9.19.6 QSFP-100G-CLR4

Item Description
Standards compliance 100GBASE-CLR4 (non-standard)
Connector type LC

distance

Item Description

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311MNP
9.19.7 QSFP-100G-CWDM4

Item Description
Standards compliance 100GBASE-CWDM4 (non-standard)
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311MNN
9.19.8 QSFP-100G-ER4-Lite


Item Description
Standards compliance Non-standard and compatible with the 100GBASE-ER4
Connector type LC

distance

sensitivity (dBm)
Part number 02311YXR
NOTE
FEC cannot be enabled on this module.

S9700 Series Switches Hardware Description

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

S9700 Series Switches Hardware Description

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

S9700 Series Terabit Core Routing Switches

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

About This Document

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation

NOTE Calls attention to important information,

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

&<1-n> The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n

# A line starting with the # sign is comments.

Device Dimension Conventions

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

5 Power Supply Facilities..............................................................................................................74

6 Fan Module................................................................................................................................. 105

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

7.1 Naming Conventions.................................................................................................................................................. 109

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

7.10.19 EH1D2G48TBC0-48-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T Interface Card (BC, RJ45).....................................................279

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

7.12.11 EH1D2X04XED0-4-Port 10GBASE-X Interface Card (ED, XFP).................................................................... 434

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

8.4 Console Cable.............................................................................................................................................................580

9 Pluggable Modules for Interfaces.......................................................................................... 606

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

9.14.1 CWDM-XFP10G-1471......................................................................................................................................... 660

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

9.18 100GE CFP Optical Modules................................................................................................................................... 687

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

1 Using the Hardware Query Tool and the

Figure 1-1 Web page of the Hardware Query Tool

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

Figure 1-2 Web page of the Hardware Configuration Tool

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

2 Version Requirements for Components

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

About This Chapter

3.1 N66E Cabinet

3.1 N66E Cabinet

3.1.1 Appearance of an N66E Cabinet

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

Figure 3-1 N66E cabinet

3.1.2 Specifications of an N66E Cabinet

Table 3-1 N66E cabinet specifications

Empty cabinet weight 73 kg±1 kg

Dimensions (W x D x H) 600 mm x 600 mm x 2200 mm

24 in. x 24 in. x 87 in.

Mounting holes on the top l Position (W x D): 450 mm x 400 mm

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

Mounting holes on the bottom l Position (W x D): 413 mm x 487 mm

Angle opening width 450 mm

Space for a chassis (distance between axes 465 mm

Distance between a front mounting rail and 95 mm

Figure 3-2 shows the dimensions of an N66E cabinet.

Issue 27 (2019-05-10) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6